Home

Omron SX inverter manual

1. Control signals J Fig 25 Connecting the control signals SX D4090 NOTE The screening of control signal cables is necessary to comply with the immunity levels given in the EMC Directive it reduces the noise level NOTE Control cables must be separated from motor and mains cables 5 5 2 Types of control signals Always make a distinction between the different types of signals Because the different types of signals can adversely affect each other use a separate cable for each type This is often more practical because for example the cable from a pressure sensor may be connected directly to the variable speed drive We can distinguish between the following types of control signals Analogue inputs Voltage or current signals 0 10 V 0 4 20 mA nor mally used as control signals for speed torque and PID feedback signals Analogue outputs Voltage or current signals 0 10 V 0 4 20 mA which change slowly or only occasionally in value In general these are control or measurement signals Digital Voltage or current signals 0 10 V 0 24 V 0 4 20 mA which can have only two values high or low and only occasionally change in value Data Usually voltage signals 0 5 V 0 10 V which change rapidly and at a high frequency generally data
2. Communication information eve Stop Off Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43096 Profibus slot index 169 0 SEH Off Fieldbus format Long 1 1 s ot d Si Modbus format Elnt 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 5 Communication information External Motor Temperature 25R Delay time starts counting when the fault disappears Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43099 When the time delay has elapsed the alarm will be Profibus slot index 169 3 reset if the function is active Fieldbus format Long 1 1 s gt X emp Modbus format Elnt St pry Off SOS aa Liquid Cooling Low level Trip Type 25U l Select the preferred way to react to an alarm trip off 0 off 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s i eve St Trip Communication information SA Default Trip Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43097 Selection Same as menu 25B Profibus slot index 168 239 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 s Communication information EENG SR Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 43100 Profibus slot index 169 4 Fieldbus format Ulnt Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 79 Modbus format Ulnt Brake Fault 25V Select the preferred way to react to an alarm trip acti vate auto reset and specify delay time V Br au St pry off Default Off Off 0 Autoreset not activated 1 36005s 1 3600s Brake fault auto reset delay time 11 2
3. 2651 IP Address 0 0 0 0 33C Brk Release 0 005 josh Mae des Hu 33D Release Spd Orpm 33E Brk Engage 0 005 2653 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 33F Brk Wait 0 005 2654 Gateway 0 0 0 0 336 VectorBrake Off 2655 DHCP Off 340 Speed 266 FB Signal 341 Min Speed Orpm 2661 FB Signal 1 342 Stp lt MinSpd Off 2662 FB Signal 2 343 Max Speed 1500rpm 2663 FB Signal 3 344 SkipSpd1Lo Orpm 2664 FB Signal 4 345 Skipspd1Hi Orpm 2665 FB Signal 5 346 Skipspd2Lo Orpm 2666 FB Signal 6 347 SkipSpd2 Hi Orpm 2667 FB Signal 7 348 Jog Speed 50rpm 2668 FB Signal 8 350 Torques 2669 FB Signal 9 351 Max Torque 120 266A FB Signal 10 352 IxR Comp Automatic 2668 FB Signal 11 353 IxR CompUsr 0 266C FB Signal 12 354 Fluxoptim Off 266D FB Signal 13 360 Preset Ref 266E FB Signal 14 361 Motor Pot Non Volatile 266F FB Signal 15 362 Preset Ref 1 0 rpm 266G FB Signal 16 363 Preset Ref 2 250 rpm 269 FB Status 364 Preset Ref 3 500 rpm Process 365 Preset Ref 4 750 rpm 310 Set View ref 366 Preset Ref 5 1000 rpm 1320 Proc Setting 367 Preset Ref 6 1250 rpm 321 Proc Source Speed 368 Preset Ref 7 1500 rpm 322 Proc Unit Off 369 Keyb Ref Normal 323 User Unit 0 380 ProcCtriPID 324 Process Min 0 381 PID Control Off 325 Process Max 0 383 PIDP Gain 1 0 326 Ratio linear 384 PID I Time 1 00s 327 F Val PrMin Min 385 PID D Ti
4. Terminal Name Function Default E a ai 5 3 Inputs configuration 1 10 V 10 VDC supply voltage with the switches 6 10 V 10 VDC supply voltage The switches S1 to S4 are used to set the input con figuration for the 4 analogue inputs Anin1 Anin2 l Common Signal ground Anin3 and Anin4 as described in table 13 See Fig 23 11 24 V 24 VDC supply voltage for the location of the switches da Common Signal ground Table 13 Switch settings 15 Common Signal ground Input Signal type Switch Digital inputs Volt al l 8 Digin 1 RunL reverse oltage 9 Digln 2 RunR f d pain S1 igin une eres Current default 10 Digln 3 Off 37 16 Digin 4 Off Voltage 7 Anin2 We EE Current default 92 18 Digln 6 Off 53 19 Digln 7 Off Voltage y Anin3 22 Digin 8 RESET Current default gt gt Digital outputs 20 DigOut1 Ready Voltage en E 21 DigOut 2 Brake Anin4 S4 Current default U Analogue inputs 2 Anin 1 Process Ref 3 Anin 2 Off NOTE Scaling and offset of Anin1 Anin4 can be di configured using the software See menus 512 515 4 Anin 3 Off 518 and 51B in section 11 5 page 119 5 Anin 4 Off Analogue outputs NOTE the 2 analogue outputs AnOut 1 and AnOut 2 can be configured using the software See menu 530 13 AnOut1 Min speed to max speed section 11 5 3 page 128 14 AnOut2 0 to max torque Relay outputs al NCI Relay 1 output 32 COM 1 Trip active wh
5. Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43321 Communication information Profibus slot index 169 225 Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 38 43 pump 1 6 Fieldbus format Ulnt Profibus slot index 0 37 0 42 Modbus format Ulnt Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Alarm Trip 412 Selects which alarm must cause a trip to the VSD Pump Status 39N r arm trip ON D ump d bh St DD Of f St pry OCH Default Off Selection Same as in menu 411 Indication Description A A A Communication information c Control master pump only when alternating masterisuseg Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43322 Suse conto Profibus slot index 169 226 S Pump iy on Fieldbus format Ulnt Pump error Modbus format Ulnt 108 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual Ramp Alarm 413 This function inhibits the pre alarm signals during acceleration deceleration of the motor to avoid false alarms A namp Alarm St pry off Default Off Pre alarms are inhibited during accelera Off 0 q tion deceleration 0 Pre alarms active during acceleration n 1 f deceleration When the application has a constant load over the whole speed range i e extruder or screw compressor the load type can be set to basic This type uses a sin gle value as a reference for the nominal load This value is used for the complete speed range of the VSD The value can be set or
6. St ply A Default A A 0 B 1 Only the selected parameter set will revert C 2 to its default settings D 3 ABCD 4 All four parameter sets will revert to the default settings All settings except 211 221 22D Factory 5 261 3A1 and 923 will revert to the default settings M1 6 M2 7 Only the selected motor set will revert to its M3 8 default settings M4 9 M1234 10 All four motor sets will revert to default set tnings f opy Set St ply A gt B Default A gt B A gt B 0 CopysetAtosetB A gt C 1 Copyset Ato setC A gt D 2 Copyset Ato set D B gt A 3 CopysetB to set A B gt C 4 Copy set B to set C B gt D 5 CopysetB to set D C gt A 6 CopysetCtosetA C gt B 7 CopysetC to set B C gt D 8 Copyset C to set D D gt A 9 Copy set D to set A D gt B 10 Copy set D to set B D gt C 11 Copy set D to set C Communication information Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43021 Profibus slot index 168 180 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43023 Profibus slot index 168 182 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt NOTE The actual value of menu 310 will not be copied into the other set NOTE Trip log hour counter and other VIEW ONLY menus are not regarded as settings and will be unaffected A gt B
7. In application situations where the feedback can ruled and the VSD is decreasing the speed gt long as become independent of the motor speed this PID Ge PID error is no 2 gc state margin the Steady Test function can be used to overrule the PID fail S SE E stea y state margin the test operation and force the VSD to go in sleep mode i e n SESENKERS Ope lation Continues SEEN the VSD automatically reduces the output speed while p e at the same time ensures the process value HO D V Example pressure controlled pump systems with low 3 D dy Mar no flow operation and where the process pressure has St PLY 0 become independent of the pump speed e g due to slowly closed valves By going into Sleep mode heat Default 0 ing of the pump and motor will be avoided and no Range 0 10000 in process unit energy is spilled PID Steady state test delay Communication information NOTE It is important that the system has reached a Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43374 stable situation before the Steady State Test is initiated Profibus slot index 170 23 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 01 s 56 PIL dy IS Modbus format Elnt St pry off Default Off Example The PID Steady Test starts when the proc ess value 711 is within the margin and Steady State Range Off 0 01 3600 s Test Wait Delay has expired The PID output will decrease speed with a step value which corresponds Communication information to the margin as
8. A EXOR operator Digital signal Expressions according to the following truth table can Signal CD1 Menu 617 be made nz Input Result Fig 89 Digital comparator A B amp AND 0R A EXOR 5 0 0 0 0 0 St DD Run 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 Default Run 1 1 1 1 0 Selection Same selections as for DigOut 1 541 Communication information The output signal can be programmed to the digital or relay outputs or used as a Virtual Connection Source 560 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43407 Profibus slot index 170 56 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Digital Comparator 2 618 0 v CA1 amp A2 amp CD1 Stp Communication information EA E be Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31035 Function is identical to digital comparator 1 Profibus slot index 121 179 JE gt Fieldbus format Long St DD Di gl n 1 Modbus format Text Default Digin 1 The expression must be programmed by means of the Selection Same selections as for DigOut 1 541 menus 621 to 625 134 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual Example Broken belt detection for Logic Y This example describes the programming for a so called broken belt detection for fan applications The comparator CA1 is set for frequency gt 10Hz The comparator A2 is set for load lt 20 The comparator CD1 is set for Run The
9. See menu 393 to 396 553 to 55C Fig 38 Fixed MASTER control NOTE The pumps MAY have different powers however the MASTER pump MUST always be the largest 7 6 3 Alternating MASTER With this function the Master pump is not fixed to the SX V all the time After the VSD is powered up or started again after a stop or sleep mode the Master pump is selected via the relay set to function Master Pump section 7 6 7 on page 49 shows a detailed wir ing diagram with 3 pumps The purpose of this func tion is that all pumps are used equally so the lifetime of all pumps including the Master pump will be equal ized Maximum 6 pumps can be controlled with this function Fig 39 Alternating MASTER Control NOTE The pumps MUST have all the same power 7 6 4 Feedback Status input In this example the additional pumps are controlled by an other kind of drive e g soft starter frequency inverter etc The digital inputs on the I O Board can be programmed as a Error input for each pump If a drive fails the digital inout will monitor this and the PUMP CONTROL option will not use that particular drive anymore and automatically switch to another drive This means that the control continues without using this faulty drive This function can also be used to manually stop a particular pump for maintenance purposes without shutting down the whole pump sys tem Of course
10. N Max Alarm St pry Trip Default Trip Selection Same as menu 25B Communication information K Min Alarm St pry off Default Off Off 0 Off 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43091 Profibus slot index 168 250 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 s Modbus format Elnt Min Alarm Trip Type 25L Select the preferred way to react to a min alarm trip Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43094 Profibus slot index 168 253 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Min Alarm St pry Trip Default Trip Selection Same as menu 25B Communication information Max Alarm 25M Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43092 Profibus slot index 168 251 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone When the time delay has elapsed the alarm will be reset if the function is active St pry Y Max Alarm Of f Default Off Off 0 Off 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43093 Over current F 250 Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone When the time delay has elapsed the alarm will be reset if the function is active O Over curr Stop Off Default Off Off 0 Off 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600
11. Anin c St pry off Default Off Selection Same as in menu 511 Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 119 Communication information Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43221 Profibus slot index 169 125 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Anin3 Setup 518 Same functions as Anin1 Setup 512 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43231 Profibus slot index 169 135 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Anin4 Set up 51B Same functions as AnIn1 Setup 512 D Anin etup Stop 4 20mA Default 4 20 mA Dependent on Setting of switch S3 Selection Same as in menu 512 D Anin4 etup St pry 4 20mA Default 4 20 mA Dependent on Setting of switch S4 Selection Same as in menu 512 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43222 Profibus slot index 169 126 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Anin3 Advanced 519 Same functions and submenus as under Anin1 Advanced 513 9 Anin St pry Advan Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43223 43230 43543 43553 Profibus slot index 169 127 169 134 170 192 170 202 Anin4 Function 51A Parameter for setting the function of Analogue Input 4 Same function as Anln1 Func 511
12. AnTn2 Setup St pLy 4 20mA Default 4 20mA Dependent on Setting of switch S2 Selection Same as in menu 512 Fig 84 Anin1 Enable 513A Parameter for enable disable analogue input selection via digital inputs DigIn set to function Anin Select A Anin nab St pry On Default On On 0 Anin1 is always active DigIn 1 Anin1 is only active if the digital input is low DigIn 2 Anin1 is only active if the digital input is high Communication information Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no Anin1 43210 Profibus slot index Anin1 169 114 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Anin2 Function 514 Parameter for setting the function of Analogue Input 2 Same function as AnIn1 Func 511 4 AN n St pry Of f Default Off Selection Same as in menu 511 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43212 Profibus dot index 169 116 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Anin2 Advanced 516 Same functions and submenus as under Anin1 Advanced 513 b Anin St pry Advan Communication information 43213 43220 Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 43542 43552 169 117 124 Profibus slot index 170 191 170 201 Anin3 Function 517 Parameter for setting the function of Analogue Input 3 Same function as Anln1 Func 511
13. Stop PT100 1 2 3 Default PT100 1 2 3 PT100 1 PT100 2 PT100 1 2 PT100 Selection 3 PT100 1 3 PT100 2 3 PT100 1 2 3 PT100 1 1 Channel 1 used for PT100 protection PT100 2 2 Channel 2 used for PT100 protection PT100 1 2 3 Channel 1 2 used for PT100 protection PT100 3 4 Channel 3 used for PT100 protection PT100 1 3 5 Channel 1 3 used for PT100 protection PT100 2 3 6 Channel 2 3 used for PT100 protection PT100 14243 7 un 1 2 3 used for PT100 protec Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43066 Profibus slot index 168 225 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt NOTE This menu is only valid for PT 100 thermal protection Motor PTC 237 In this menu the internal motor PTC hardware option is enabled This PTC input complies with DIN 44081 44082 Please refer to the manual for the PTC PT100 option board for electrical specification This menu is only visible if a PTC or resistor lt 2 kOhm is connected to terminals X1 78 79 To enable the function 1 Connect the thermistor wires to X1 78 79 or for testing the input connect a resistor to the termi nals Use resistor value between 50 and 2000 ohm Menu 237 will now appear 70 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual 2 Enable input by setting menu 237 Motor PTC On If enabled and lt 50 ohm a sensor error trip will occur The message Motor PTC is shown
14. For communication with the VSD there are several option boards for communication There are different options for Fieldbus communication and one serial communication option with RS232 or RS485 interface which has galvanic isolation 13 7 Standby supply board 164 Options Omron SX inverter manual option Order number Description 01 3954 00 Standby power supply kit for after mounting The standby supply board option provides the possi bility of keeping the communication system up and running without having the 3 phase mains connected One advantage is that the system can be set up with out mains power The option will also give backup for communication failure if main power is lost The standby supply board option is supplied with external 10 24 Vpg or 24 Vac protected by a 2 A slow act ing fuse from a double isolated transformer The ter minals X1 1 and X1 2 are voltage polarity independent connecting 24 Vpg to secure the supply voltage for the driver circuits of the power conductors via safety relay K1 See also Fig 105 e High signal on the digital inout e g terminal 9 in Fig 105 which is set to Enable For setting the digital input please refer to section 11 5 2 page 126 These two signals need to be combined and used to enable the output of the VSD and make it possible to activate a Safe Stop condition X1 1 Left terminal GE X1 2 Right te
15. Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no Goes Profibus slot index 121 147 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 Modbus format Elnt Shaft power 714 Displays the actual shaft power 711 aft Power Stp Unit W Resolution 1W Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31005 Profibus slot index 121 149 Fieldbus format Long 1 1W Modbus format Elnt Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31007 Profibus slot index 121 151 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 1A Modbus format Elnt Output Voltage 717 Displays the actual output voltage Output Vo Stp V Unit V Resolution 1V Communication information Electrical Power 715 Displays the actual electrical output power Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31008 Profibus slot index 121 152 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 1 V Modbus format Elnt Frequency 718 Displays the actual output frequency B Frequency Unit kW Resolution 1W Stp Hz Unit Hz Resolution 0 1 Hz Communication information Communication information Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 31009 Profibus slot index 121 153 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 1 Hz Modbus format Elnt Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31006 Profibus slot index 121 150 Fieldbus format Long 1 1W Modbus format Elnt Omron SX i
16. 240 s 120 1000 s 120 480 s 120 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 15 1 6 At 1 8 1 9 2 Actual output current I t current Fig 50 Ft function Fig 50 shows how the function integrates the square of the motor current according to the Mot 12t Curr 232 and the Mot I t Time 233 When the selection Trip is set in menu 231 the VSD trips if this limit is exceeded When the selection Limit is set in menu 231 the VSD reduces the torque if the integrated value is 95 or closer to the limit so that the limit cannot be exceeded NOTE If it is not possible to reduce the current the VSD will trip after exceeding 110 of the limit Example In Fig 50 the thick grey line shows the following exam ple e Menu 232 Mot Et Curr is set to 100 1 2 x 100 120 e Menu 233 Mot Et Time is set to 1000 s This means that the VSD will trip or reduce after 1000 s if the current is 1 2 times of 100 nominal motor current Thermal Protection 234 Only visible if the PTC PT100 option board is installed Set the PTC input for thermal protection of the motor The motor thermistors PTC must comply with DIN 44081 44082 Please refer to the manual for the PTC PT100 option board Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 69 Menu 234 PTC contains functions to enable or disa ble the PTC input i ermal Pro St pry off Default Off PTC and PT100 moto
17. Ani nl Bipo Stpgy 10 00V Default 0 00 10 00 V Range 0 0 20 0 mA 0 00 10 00 V 4 Anin cMin St py Min Default Min Min 0 Min value Max 1 Max value User j j defined 2 Define user value in menu 5135 Table 22 shows corresponding values for the min and max selections depending on the function of the ana logue input 511 Table 22 Anin Function Min Max Speed Min Speed 341 Max Speed 343 Torque 0 Max Torque 351 Process Ref Process Min 324 Process Max 325 Process Value Process Min 324 Communication information Process Max 325 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43206 Profibus slot index 169 110 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Anin1 Function Value Min 5 135 With Anin1 Function ValMin you define a user defined value for the signal Only visible when user defined is selected in menu 5134 Anini VaMin St pEy 0 000 Default 0 000 Range 10000 000 10000 000 Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 117 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43541 Profibus slot index 170 190 Long Speed 1 1 rpm Torque 1 1 Process val 1 0 001 Fieldbus format Modbus format Elnt Anin1 Function Max 5136 With Anln1 Function Max the physical maximum value is scaled to selected process unit The default scalin
18. Voltage tests Megger Do not carry out voltage tests Megger on the motor before all the motor cables have been disconnected from the variable speed drive Precautions during Autoreset When the automatic reset is active the motor may restart automatically provided that the cause of the trip has been removed If necessary take the appropriate precautions Heat warning Be aware of specific parts on the VSD having high temperature Do not touch the Inverter fins braking resistors and the motor which may become too hot during the power supply and for some time after the power shut off Doing so may result in a burn Do not Operate the inverter with wet hands Do not operate the Digital Operator or switches with wet hands Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock gt bbbb FP PP Omron SX inverter manual Omron SX inverter manual Contents 11 12 1 3 1 4 1 4 1 15 15 1 1 6 1 6 1 1 6 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 1 2 3 2 3 1 3 2 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 5 1 3 5 2 3 6 3 7 4 1 4 1 1 4 1 2 4 2 4 3 4 3 1 4 3 2 4 3 3 4 3 4 4 4 4 4 1 4 4 2 4 4 3 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 1 Introduction zurererenenennnan nen 7 Delivery and UNPACKING eee te teeeeteteeetee 7 Using of the instruction manual 7 Ordering codes Ich Product standard for EMC un 8 Dismantling and scrapping 10 Disposal of old electrical and electronic
19. ANni n4 c St ply Of f Default Off Selection Same as in menu 511 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43232 Profibus slot index 169 136 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Anin4 Advanced 51C Same functions and submenus as under Anin1 Advanced 513 AN nd St pry Communication information Advan 43233 43240 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43544 43554 169 137 144 Profibus slot index 170 193 170 203 120 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual 11 5 2 Digital Inputs 520 Submenu with all the settings for the digital inputs NOTE Additional inputs will become available when the 1 O option boards are connected Digital Input 1 521 To select the function of the digital input On the standard control board there are eight digital inputs If the same function is programmed for more than one input that function will be activated according to OR logic if nothing else is stated 521 Digin 1 St pry RunL Default RunL Off 0 The input is not active Be aware that if there is nothing connected to the input the VSD will trip at External Ext Trip 3 trip immediately NOTE The External Trip is active low NOTE Activated according to AND logic Stop command according to the selected Stop mode in menu 33B NOTE The Stop command is active low NOT
20. Profibus slot index 168 213 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt PWM Random 22E3 Trip trip on Motor I t Limit This mode helps to keep the inverter run ning when the Motor I2t function is just before tripping the VSD The trip is replaced by current limiting with a maxi mum current level set by the value out of the menu 232 In this way if the reduced current can drive the load the VSD contin ues running AV St ply Default Off Random off Communication information Off Random modulation is Off Random modulation is active Random fre Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43061 Profibus dot index 168 220 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt in E22E1 On 1 quency variation range is 1 8 of level set Communication information NOTE When Mot I2t Type Limit the VSD can control the speed lt MinSpeed to reduce the motor current Motor 12t Current 232 Sets the current limit for the motor I t protection Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43055 Profibus slot index 168 214 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt 232 Mot I t Curr 11 2 5 Motor Protection 230 This function protects the motor against overload based on the standard IEC 60947 4 2 Motor 12t Type 231 The motor protection function makes it possible to protect the mot
21. Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Timer 2 T1 654 054 Timer St DD Default 0 00 00 hr min sec 0 00 00 Range 0 00 00 9 59 59 Communication information Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43456 hours 43457 minutes 43458 seconds Profibus slot index 170 105 170 106 170 107 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43451 Profibus slot index 170 100 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Timer 2 Mode 652 0 imer2 Mode St pry off Default Off Selection Same as in menu 642 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43452 Profibus slot index 170 101 Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 139 Timer 2 T2 655 0 I mer St pry 0 00 00 Default 0 00 00 hr min sec Range 0 00 00 9 59 59 Communication information 11 7 1 Operation 710 Process Value 711 The process value is a display function which can be programmed according to several quantities and units related to the reference value Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43459 hours 43460 minutes 43461 seconds Profibus slot index 170 108 170 109 170 110 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Process Va Stp Unit
22. 535 AnOut2 Setup 4 20mA 536 AnOut2 Advan 5361 AnOut 2 Min 4mA 5362 AnOut 2 Max 20 0mA 5363 AnOut2Bipol 20 0mA 5364 AnOut2 FcMin Min 5365 AnOut2 VIMin 0 5366 AnOut2 FcMax Max 5367 AnOut2 VIMax 0 540 Dig Outputs 541 DigOut 1 Ready 542 DigOut 2 No Trip 550 Relays 551 Relayl Trip 552 Relay2 Run 553 Relay 3 Off 554 B oard 1 Relay 1 Off 555 B oard 1 Relay 2 Off 556 B oard l Relay 3 Off 557 B oard 2 Relay 1 Off 558 B oard 2 Relay 2 Off 559 B oard 2 Relay 3 Off 554 B oard 3 Relay 1 Off 558 B oard 3 Relay 2 Off 55C B oard 3 Relay 3 Off 55D Relay Adv 5501 Relay1 Mode N O 5502 Relay2 Mode N O 5503 Relay3 Mode N O 55D4 B1R1 Mode N O 55D5 BIR2 Mode N O 55D6 B1R3 Mode N O 55D7 B2R1 Mode N O 55D8 B2R2 Mode N O 55D9 B2R3 Mode N O 55DA B3R1 Mode N O 55DB B3R2 Mode N O 55DC B3R3 Mode N O 560 Virtual I Os 561 VIO 1 Dest Off 562 VIO 1 Source Off 563 VIO 2 Dest Off 564 VIO2 Source Off 565 VIO 3 Dest Off 566 VIO 3 Source Off 567 VIO 4 Dest Off 568 VIO 4 Source Off 184 Menu List Omron SX inverter manual DEFAULT CUSTOM DEFAULT CUSTOM 569 VIO5 Dest Off 712 Speed 56A VIO 5 Source Off 713 Torque 56B VIO 6 Dest Off 714 Shaft Power 56c VIO 6 So
23. Analogue Comparator 2 Level Low 616 Function is identical to analogue comparator 1 level low O LO i eve U St pry 10 Default 10 Range Enter a value for the low level Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 133 Communication information Communication information 1H 1 1 rpm or 0 001 via process value Modbus format Elnt Digital Comparator 1 617 Selection of the input signal for digital comparator 1 CD1 The output signal CD1 becomes high if the selected input signal is active See Fig 89 The output signal can be programmed to the digital or relay outputs or used as a source for the virtual con nections 560 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43406 Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 43408 Profibus slot index 170 55 Profibus slot index 170 57 Long Fieldbus format Ulnt 1 1 W 0 1 A 0 1 V Fieldbus format 0 1 Hz 0 1 C 1 kWh Modbus format Ulnt 11 6 2 Logic Output Y 620 By means of an expression editor the comparator sig nals can be logically combined into the Logic Y func tion The expression editor has the following features e The following signals can be used CA1 CA2 CD1 CD2 or LZ or LY e The following signals can be inverted IA1 A2 D1 D2 or LZ or LY e The following logical operators are available OR operator 8 AND operator
24. Table 20 gt Wewer Selected process Unit for reference and 0 0 0 0 source actual value Resolution Default 0 0 0 0 Speed rpm 4 digits 82 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual Table 20 Selected process Unit for reference and Resolution source actual value Torque 3 digits PT100 C 3 digits Frequency Hz 3 digits 11 3 1 Set View Reference Value 310 View reference value As default the menu 810 is in view operation The value of the active reference signal is displayed The value is displayed according to selected process source 821 or the process unit selected in menu 322 Set reference value If the function Reference Control 214 is set to Ref Control Keyboard the reference value can be set in menu Set View Reference 310 as a normal parame ter or as a motor potentiometer with the and keys on the control panel depending on the selection of Keyboard Reference Mode in menu 369 The ramp times used for setting the reference value with the Normal function selected in menu 369 are according to the set Acc Time 331 and Dec Time 332 The ramp times used for setting the reference value with the MotPot function selected in 369 are according to the set Acc MotPot 333 and Dec MotPot 334 Menu 310 displays on line the actual reference value according to the Mode Settings in Table 20 0 Set View
25. float f eint16 evalue evalue eint16 amp value if evalue f if evalue e gt 0 f int evalue m powl0 evalue e else f int evalue m powl10 abs evalue e else f value return f 56 Serial communication Omron SX inverter manual Example of 15 bit fixed point format The value 72 0 can be represented as the fixed point number 72 It is within the range 0 32767 which means that the 15 bit fixed point format may be used The value will then be represented as B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 BS B4 B3 B2 Bl BO D D D D D D 0 0 org FT 0 0 p Where bit 15 indicates that we are using the fixed point format F 0 Omron SX inverter manual Serial communication 57 58 Serial communication Omron SX inverter manual 11 Functional Description This chapter describes the menus and parameters in the software You will find a short description of each function and information about default values ranges etc There are also tables containing communication information You will find the Modbus DeviceNet and Fieldbus address for each parameter as well as the enumeration for the data NOTE Functions marked with the sign 8 cannot be changed during Run Mode Description of table layout U0 st Line Stop 2nd Line Fig 47 Display functions 11 1 1 1st Line 110 Sets the content of the upper row in the menu 100 Preferred View 0 Ist Line Stppy
26. Category C2 Power Drive System PDS of rated volt age lt 1 000 V which is neither a plug in device nor a movable device and when used in the first environ ment is intended to be installed and commissioned only by a professional Second environment Standard EMC includes all other establishments Category C3 PDS of rated voltage lt 1 000 V intended for use in the second environment and not intended for use in the first environment Category C4 PDS or rated voltage equal or above 1 000 V or rated current equal to or above 400 A or intended for use in complex systems in the second By using the optional Extended EMC filter the VSD fulfils requirements according to category C2 WARNING In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case it may be necessary to take adequate additional measures AN AN WARNING The standard VSD complying with category C3 is not intended to be used on a low voltage public network which supplies domestic premises radio interference is expected if used in such a network Contact your supplier if you need additional environment The variable speed drive complies with the product standard EN IEC 61800 3 2004 Any kind of metal screened cable may be used The standard variable speed drive is designed to meet the requirements according to measures CAUTION In order to comply fully with the standards stated in t
27. In this example we select the SX D4110 EV 14 4 Operation at higher switching frequency Table 38 shows the switching frequency for the differ ent VSD models With the possibility of running at higher switching frequency you can reduce the noise level from the motor The switching frequency is set in menu 22A Motor sound see section section 11 2 3 172 Technical Data Omron SX inverter manual 14 5 Dimensions and Weights standard The table below gives an overview of the dimensions and weights The models SX D4090 EV to SX D4132 EV in 400V and SX D6090 EV to SX D6250 EV in 690V are available in IP54 as wall mounted modules The mod els SX 4160 EV to SX 4800 EV in 400V and SX 6315 EV to SX 61KO EV in 690V consist of 2 3 4 or 6 paral leled power electonic building block PEBB available in IP20 as wall mounted modules and in IP54 mounted standard cabinet Table 39 Mechanical specifications SX V 400V Protection class IP54 is according to the EN 60529 M odels Frame Dim H x W x D mm Dim H x W x D mm Weight IP20 Weight IP54 size IP20 A4xxx IP54 D4xxx kg kg 4090 E 950 x285 x314 60 4110 to 4132 F 950 x345 x314 74 4160 to 4200 G 1036 x500 x390 2330 x600 x500 140 270 4220 to 4250 H 1036 x500 x450 2330 x600 x600 170 305 4315 to 4400 l 1036 x 730 x450 2330 x 1000 x600 248 440 4450 to 4500 J 1036 x1100 x450 2330 x1200
28. 14 7 1 According IEC ratings Use mains fuses of the type gL gG conforming to IEC 269 or installation cut outs with similar characteristics Check the equipment first before installing the glands Max Fuse maximum fuse value that still protects the VSD and upholds warranty Table 43 Fuses cable cross sections and glands for 400V NOTE The dimensions of fuse and cable cross section are dependent on the application and must be determined in accordance with local regulations NOTE The dimensions of the power terminals used in the models 4160 to 0 at 400V and 6315 to 61K0 at 690V can differ depending on customer specification SN Maximum Cable cross section connector range mm for SE SE range Model p value fuse current A A mains motor Brake PE mains motor Brake 35 150 0830 45 SX D4090 EV 152 160 35 150 16 95 16 70 cable entry or M63 SX D4110 EV 182 200 A y 35 240 1027 66 cable entry SX D4132 EV 216 250 SX 4160 EV 260 300 2x 35 240 frame SX 4200 EV 324 355 SX 4220 EV 372 400 2x 35 240 frame SX 4250 EV 432 500 174 Technical Data Omron SX inverter manual Table 43 Fuses cable cross sections and glands for 400V Nominal Maximum Cable cross section connector range mm for Cable glands clamping range input mm Model value fuse current A A mains motor Brake PE mains motor
29. Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone When the time delay has elapsed the alarm will be reset if the function is active PT100 25C Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone When the time delay has elapsed the alarm will be reset if the function is active St pry off Default Off Off 0 Off 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s Communication information 25A Motor t St pry Of f Default Off Off 0 Off 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43073 Profibus slot index 168 232 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 s Modbus format Elnt Motor I t Trip Type 25B Select the preferred way to react to a Motor I t trip 25B Motor 1 t TT Communication information St pry Trip Default Trip Trip 0 The motor will trip Deceleration 1 The motor will decelerate Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43074 Profibus slot index 168 233 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 43078 Profibus dot index 168 237 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 s Modbus format Elnt PT100 Trip Type 25D Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone When the time delay has elapsea the alarm will be reset if the function is active D P OU St pry Trip Default Trip Selection Same as men
30. If the function is disabled and the PTC or resistor is removed the menu will disappear after the next power up 237 Motor PTC St pry Off Default Off Off 0 Motor PTC protection is disabled On 1 Motor PTC protection is enabled Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43067 Profibus slot index 168 226 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt 11 2 6 Parameter Set Handling 240 There are four different parameter sets available in the VSD These parameter sets can be used to set the VSD up for different processes or applications such as different motors used and connected activated PID controller different ramp time settings etc A parameter set consists of all parameters with the exception of the menu 211 Language 217 Local Remote 218 Lock Code 220 Motor Data 241 Select Set 260 Serial Communication and 21B Mains supply voltage NOTE Actual timers are common for all sets When a set is changed the timer functionality will change according to the new set but the timer value will stay unchanged Select Set 241 Here you select the parameter set Every menu included in the parameter sets is designated A B Cor D depending on the active parameter set Parameter sets can be selected from the keyboard via the pro grammable digital inputs or via serial communication Parameter sets can be changed during the run If the sets
31. The motor must run on the speed that generates the load that needs to be recorded If the With load type Basic 415 used the Min Alarm Mar gin sets the band under the Normal Load 41B menu that does not generate an alarm With load type Load Curve 415 used the Min Alarm Margin sets the band under the Load Curve 41C that does not gen erate an alarm The Max Alarm Margin is a percentage of nominal motor torque selected Load Type 415 is Load Curve it performs a test run and populates the Load Curve 41C with the 413 Mi nAl ar mMar St pry 15 Default 15 Range 0 400 Communication information Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 43329 Profibus slot index 169 233 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 Modbus format Elnt found load values to maximum speed A WARNING When autoset does a test run the motor and application machine will ramp up NOTE The motor must be running for the Autoset Alarm function to succeed A not running motor generates a Failed message IA Autoset Alrm St pry No Default No No 0 Yes 1 Communication information Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 43334 Profibus slot index 169 238 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 111 The default set levels for the pre alarms are Max Alarm menu 4161 41B Overloa
32. 20 00 mA 0 10 00 V Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43253 AnOutl Bipol 5333 Automatically displayed if User Bipol mA or User Bipol V is selected in menu AnOut1 Setup The menu will automatically show mA or V range according to the selected function The range is set by changing the positive maximum value the negative value is auto matically adapted accordingly Only visible if 512 User Bipol MAY ANQut LBI po Stp 10 00 10 00V Default 10 00 10 00 V Range 10 00 10 00 V 20 0 20 0 mA Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43255 Profibus dot index 169 159 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 01 Modbus format Elnt AnOutl Function Min 5334 With AnOut1 Function Min the physical minimum value is scaled to selected presentation The default scaling is dependent of the selected function of AnOut1 531 Profibus slot index 169 157 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 01 Modbus format Elnt AnOutl Max 5332 This parameter is automatically displayed if User mA or User V is selected in menu AnOut1 Setup 532 The menu will automatically adapt to current or volt age setting according to the selected setup Only visi ble if 532 User mA V An Ou Max Stp 20 0mA Default 20 00 mA Range 0 00 20 00 mA 0 10 00 V Communication information 4 An0u Min St DD Min Default
33. 3 Enter the settings for other parameters e g inputs and outputs 4 lf there are only minor differences between the set tings in the parameter sets you can copy parame ter set A to parameter set B menu 242 5 Enter the settings for parameters e g inputs and outputs Note Do not change motor data in parameter set B 7 1 3 Two motors and two parameter sets This is useful if you have a machine with two motors that can not run at the same time such as a cable winding machine that lifts up the reel with one motor and then turns the wheel with the other motor 36 Main Features Omron SX inverter manual One motor must stop before changing to an other motor 1 Select parameter set A in menu 241 2 Select motor M1 in menu 212 3 Enter motor data and settings for other parameters e g inputs and outputs 4 Select parameter set B in menu 241 5 Select M2 in menu 212 6 Enter motor data and settings for other parameters e g inputs and outputs 7 1 4 Autoreset at trip For several non critical application related failure con ditions it is possible to automatically generate a reset command to overcome the fault condition The selec tion can be made in menu 250 In this menu the max imum number of automatically generated restarts allowed can be set see menu 251 after this the VSD will stay in fault condition because external assistance is required Example The motor is
34. 42 shows the default toggle loop This loop con tains the necessary menus that need to be set before starting Press Toggle to enter menu 211 then use the Next key to enter the sub menus 212 to 21A and enter the parameters When you press the Toggle key again menu 221 is displayed pa a Submenus 4 gt 7 212 A RT 511 Toggle loopl2 11 lt a LOCIREM 341 221 j gt Sa Te to A E Indication of menus in toggle loop Menus included in the toggle loop are indicated with a in area B in the display 21 LA Le Fig 42 Default toggle loop Loc Rem function The Loc Rem function of this key is disabled as default Enable the function in menu 2171 and or 2172 With the function Loc Rem you can change between local and remote control of the VSD from the control panel The function Loc Rem can also be changed via the Digln see menu Digital inputs 520 Change control mode 1 Press the Loc Rem key for five seconds until Local or Remote is displayed 2 Confirm with Enter 3 Cancel with Esc Local mode Local mode is used for temporary operation When switched to LOCAL operation the VSD is controlled via th
35. 9 3 9 3 1 9 4 9 5 9 6 9 7 Terminal connections seeren 28 Inputs configuration with the SWItCheS s ssssiesissesseereerierierierienrerrenrenrenres Connection example Connecting the Control Signals lee na engere Types of control signals EE SCrEENING dere Single ended or double ended connection 31 Current Signals 0 4 20 m h 32 Twisted cables 32 Connecting OPTIONS naesaesenenesenenennnnnenennnnnnnennnnnnnenn 32 Applications cccceceeeeeeeeeeeneees 33 Application overview 33 Cranes vainas olor iio 33 A tege Eed Eu 33 UE 34 MI at gek Ee 34 Main Features 35 Parameter SetS nunsnnsesnnensnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nen 35 One motor and one parameter set 36 One motor and two parameter sets 36 Two motors and two parameter sets 36 Autoreset at Dip Reference priority Preset references Remote control functions Performing an Identification Run Using the Control Panel Memory Load Monitor and Process Protection 4001 40 Load Monitor MIO 40 EMC and Machine Directive 45 EMC standards aiii aii Stop categories and emergency stop Operation via the Control Panel 47 Generali nein The control panel ENEE ENEE Thedisplay ri Indications on the display LED indicators vo Control keys The Toggle and Loc Rem Key Function Kia The menu structure sessies The main menu snnseneesnenneneennenenennnnnnn Programming during operation sss 51 Editing val
36. DI gin St ply RunR Default RunR Selection Same as in menu 521 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43241 43248 Profibus slot index Fieldbus format 169 146 169 152 Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Additional digital inputs 529 to 52H Additional digital inputs with I O option board installed B1 Digln 1 529 B3 DigIn 3 52H B stands for board and 1 to 3 is the number of the board which is related to the position of the I O option board on the option mounting plate The functions and selections are the same as DigIn 1 521 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43501 43509 An Qu c St pry Speed Default Speed Process Val 0 Actual process value according to Proc ess feedback signal Speed 1 Actual speed Torque 2 Actual torque Process Ref 3 Actual process reference value Shaft Power 4 Actual shaft power Frequency 5 Actual frequency Current 6 Actual current El power 7 Actual electrical power Output volt 8 Actual output voltage DC voltage 9 Actual DC link voltage Anin1 10 Mirror of received signal value on Anin1 Anin2 1 Mirror of received signal value on Anin2 Anin3 12 Mirror of received signal value on Anin3 Anin4 13 Mirror of received signal value on Anin4 Actual internal speed reference Value speed AC after ramp and V Hz Actual torque reference value Torque Ref 1
37. EE 150 EEN 150 EE EE 150 EE 151 TEE 151 Fy tes lel atch a a TGs Se Tel 151 ER REN EEE 151 EEN 151 EE 152 EE 152 ENEE 152 EE 152 BUN EE 152 TIER TN Ae A 152 153 A a Riis 153 Eeer 153 TEEN 154 VO E ene ttre Tie en EE 154 192 Omron SX inverter manual IER 154 Minimum Frequency isciscccccssscossssacs secnesbspetvnnavese eevee nnes 90 Monitor function Alarm Select unse 117 Delay EE 114 Max Allatin E 114 Ovetload irene Geet Eege 40 114 Response delay csi tit 115 117 Start dela Aude csaatainadihiataiandei sens 114 Motor Cables cion 17 Motor cos phi power factor ueneessnnesenennnnenenenesennenenen 66 A secessesessevescsves Eed e 64 Motor Frequency ET 65 Motor frequency rencia dds Ellis 65 Motor Pt Current bia kd deed Eed 159 Motor identification run omooooonoonnnnnonnconcnnnonnconncnocnncnnnos 66 Motor Potentiometer ccccccesesesssesssseeeeseeeeeees 99 127 Motor potentiometer nennen shit 127 Motor ventilation irnn n n n EN RNR 66 A O 7 Motors in parallel ottobre 21 MotP ot gegen d dee rica 90 N Nominal motor frequency eensenenesesnnnenenennnnenenenesesnennen 96 Number of drives ccccccccccsccssecsecssessecsecsascnsceeeeeseeeees 105 0 Operation iia 60 OPtIONS ce succes ii e iii ies 32 Brake chopper sta 163 External Control Panel ECP ccceceeeseeeeeeeee 163 VO Borda hates nen enc 164 Output colls sica iris 164 Protection class IP23 and IP54 nnnsene 163 Serial
38. It is possible to leave 2 pumps running dur ing the change operation This can be set with Drives on Change 396 The master drive will be changed if the timer setting in Change Timer 395 has elapsed The new master will be selected according to the elapsed Run Time The change will only take place after a Power Up Stop Standby condition Trip condition Communication information Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43163 Profibus slot index 169 67 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43164 Profibus dot index 169 68 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt NOTE This menu will NOT be active if less than 3 drives are selected NOTE If the Status feedback inputs DigIn 9 to Digin 14 are used the master drive will be changed immediately if the feedback generates an Error Change Condition 394 This parameter determines the criteria for changing the master This menu only appears if Alternating MASTER operation is selected The elapsed run time of each drive is monitored The elapsed run time always determines which drive will be the new mas ter drive This function is only active if the parameter Select Drive 393 All Stpyy 9 4 ange Long Both Default Both changed The change will after a Power Up Stop Standby
39. Min Min 0 Min value Max 1 Max value User defined 2 Define user value in menu 5335 Table 24 shows corresponding values for the min and max selections depending on the function of the ana logue output 531 Table 24 AnOut Function Max Value Min Value Process Value Process Min 324 Process Max 325 Speed Min Speed 341 Max Speed 343 Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 43254 Torque 0 Max Torque 351 Process Ref Process Min 324 Process Max 325 Shaft Power 0 Motor Power 223 Profibus slot index 169 158 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 01 Modbus format Elnt Frequency 0 Hz Motor Frequency 222 Current DA Motor Current 224 El Power OW Motor Power 223 Output Voltage 0 V Motor Voltage 221 124 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual Table 24 Andut Min Value Max Value Function DC voltage DV 1000 V Aninl Anin1 Function Mim Anin1 Function Max Anin2 Anin2 Function Mim Anin2 Function Max Anin3 Anin3 Function Mim Anin3 Function Max Anin4 Anin4 Function Mim Anin4 Function Max Fmin is dependent on the set value in menu Mini mum Speed 341 Communication information is dependent on the selected function of AnOut1 531 See Table 24 o AnOu Max St pry Max Default Max Min 0 Min value Max 1 Max value User defined 2 Defin
40. PrMin 150 327 Bottles s 10 100 Process Min 324 Process Max 325 Fig 52 11 3 3 Start Stop settings 330 Submenu with all the functions for acceleration decel eration starting stopping etc Acceleration Time 331 The acceleration time is defined as the time it takes for the motor to accelerate from O rpm to nominal motor speed NOTE If the Acc Time is too short the motor is accelerated according to the Torque Limit The actual Acceleration Time may then be longer than the value set ACC ime St pry 10 0s Default 10 05 Range 0 50 3600 s Communication information Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 43101 Profibus dot index 169 5 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 01 s Modbus format Elnt Fig 53 shows the relationship between nominal motor speed max speed and the acceleration time The same is valid for the deceleration time rpm Nominal Speed TOOT mor la ee ee Max Speed 80 nmor 1 8s 10s gt t 06 F12 Fig 53 Acceleration time and maximum speed Fig 54 shows the settings of the acceleration and deceleration times with respect to the nominal motor speed Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 87 rpm Nom Speed Acc Time 331 Dec Time 332 NG_06 F11 Fig 54 Acceleration and deceleration times Deceleration Time 332 The deceleration time is defined as th
41. SX 4400 EV SX 4450 EV 3 z 4 x AWG 4 0 24 18 3 x AWG 3 0 24 18 ne A SX 4500 EV 4x300 kcmil 3 x 400 kcmil SX 4630 EV x 3 6 x AWG 4 0 24 18 6 xAWG 3 0 24 18 fare SX 4800 EV 6 x 300 kcmil 6 x400 kcmil 178 Technical Data Omron SX inverter manual 14 8 Control signals Table 47 Terminal Name Function Default Signal Type 1 10 V 10 VDC Supply voltage 10 VDC max 10 mA output 2 Anin1 Process reference an JOA analogue input Anz Ei BE 10 VOCor 20 20 ma analogue input a pune off EN 20 ma analogue input 3 anna E EE a EE 6 10 V 10VDC Supply voltage 10 VDC max 10 mA output 7 Common Signal ground ov output 8 Digin 1 RunL 0 8 24 VDC digital input 9 Digln 2 RunR 0 8 24 VDC digital input 10 Digin 3 Off 0 8 24 VDC digital input 11 24 V 24VDC Supply voltage 24 VDC 100 mA output 12 Common Signal ground UV output 13 AnOut 1 Min speed to max speed 0 10 VDC or0 4 20 mA analogue output 14 AnOut 2 0 to max torque 0 10 VDC or0 4 20 mA analogue output 15 Common Signal ground OV output 16 Digin 4 Off 0 8 24 VDC digital input 17 Digln 5 Off 0 8 24 VDC digital input 18 DigIn 6 Off 0 8 24 VDC digital input 19 Digln 7 Off 0 8 24 VDC digital input 20 DigOut 1 Ready 24 VDC 100 mA digital output 21 DigOut 2 Brake 24 VDC 100 mA digital output 22 Digln 8 RESET 0 8 24 VDC digital input Terminal X2 31 N C 1 Relay 1 output 32 COM un Ge
42. See Fig 47 Communication information Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 43001 Profibus slot index 168 160 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 59 11 1 2 2nd Line 120 Sets the content of the lower row in the menu 100 Preferred View Same selection as in menu 110 U no ine St pry Current Default Current 11 2 Main Setup 200 The Main Setup menu contains the most important settings to get the VSD operational and set up for the application It includes different sub menus concerning the control of the unit motor data and protection utili ties and automatic resetting of faults This menu will instantaneously be adapted to build in options and show the required settings 11 2 1 Operation 210 Selections concerning the used motor VSD mode control signals and serial communication are described in this submenu and is used to set the VSD up for the application Language 211 Select the language used on the LC Display Once the language is set this selection will not be affected by the Load Default command anguage Ston English Default English English 0 English selected Svenska 1 Swedish selected Nederlands 2 Dutch selected Deutsch 3 German selected Francais 4 French selected Espa ol 5 Spanish selected Pyccku 6 Russian selected Italiano 7 Italian selec
43. St pry Os Default Os Range 0 999 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43169 Profibus slot index 169 73 Fieldbus format Long 1 1s Modbus format Elnt Upper band Min K 1 1 1 1 H 1 1 H 1 H 1 4 1 1 H 1 4 47 7 lt gt N 4 next pump starts immediately Upper band limit 39B Flow Pressure Start Delay 399 NG_50 PC 14_2 Fig 72 Upper band limit Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 105 Lower Band Limit 39C If the speed of the pump reaches the lower band limit the top pump is stopped immediately without delay If a stop delay is used this delay will be ignored Range is from 0 equalling min speed to the set percentage for the Lower Band 398 y ow Bano Im Step 0 Default 0 0 to Lower Band level 0 min speed means Range that he Limit function is switched off Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43172 Profibus slot index 169 76 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 Modbus format Elnt top pump stops immediately f a o 4 S i Lower band A limit 39C Flow Pressure Stop Delay 39A NG_50 PC 15_2 Fig 73 Lower band limit Settle Time Start 39D The settle start allows the process to settle after a pump is switched o
44. The pumps may have different power sizes but the master pump SX V must always have the greatest power 4 Programming the Digital inputs If the digital inputs are used the digital input function must be set to Drive feedback 5 Programming the Relay outputs After the Pump controller is switched on in menu 391 the number of drives pumps fans etc must be set in menu 392 Number of Drives The relays themselves must be set to the function SlavePump1 6 and if Alternate master is used MasterPumpl 6 as well 6 Equal Pumps If all pumps are equal in power size it is likely that the Upper band is much smaller than the Lower band because the max imum pump discharge of the master pump is the same if the pump is connected to the mains 50Hz This can give a very narrow hysteresis causing an unstable control area in the flow pressure By setting the maximum frequency of the inverter only slightly above 50Hz it means that the master pump has a slightly bigger pump discharge than the pump on the mains Of course caution is essential in order to prevent the master pump running at a higher frequency for a longer period of time which in turn prevents the master pump from overloading 7 Minimum Speed With pumps and fans it is normal to use a minimum speed because at lower speed the discharge of the pump or fan will be low until 30 50 of the nominal speed depending on size power pump properties etc Wh
45. cabinet the internal wiring must comply with the EMC standard Fig 15 shows an example of a VSD built into a cabinet VSD built into cabinet RFI Filter option Mains L3 L Metal EMC cable glands Output coil option Litz p option Screened cables i Unpainted mounting plate Metal connector housing Mains Metal coupling nut L1 L2 L3 PE J Motor s Brake resistor option 06 F39 Fig 15 Variable speed drive in a cabinet on a mounting plate Fig 16 shows an example when there is no metal mounting plate used e g if IP54 variable speed drives are used It is important to keep the circuit closed by using metal housing and cable glands 18 Installation Omron SX inverter manual RFI Filter Mains L1 L2 L3 PE DC DC R Metal EMC cable glands Screened cables Metal housing Brake Output resistor coils option option Metal connector housing Metal cable gland Motor Mains ih 06 F41 Fig 16 Variable speed drive as stand alone Connect motor cables 1 Remove the cable
46. connected and that the terminal screws are tightened DC link voltage ripple exceeds maximum Check that the mains supply voltage is within the limits DC link error level of the VSD Try to use other mains supply lines if dip is caused by other machinery PF Curr Err Error in current balancing E echeck motor Check fuses and line connections PF Overvolt PF Comm Err Error in voltage balancing Internal communication error Check motor Check fuses and line connections Contact service Brake not engaged during stop PF Int Temp Internal temperature too high Check internal fans PF Temp Err Malfunction in temperature sensor Contact service e Check mains supply voltage x PF DC Err DC link error and mains supply fault e Check fusee andiineconneei ne PF HCB Err Error in controlled rectifier module HCB Check mains supply voltage RE SUPET Mains supy fault Check fuses and line connections Low liquid cooling level in external reservoir Si External input DigIn 1 8 active ences liquid cooling La Ge Check the equipment and wiring that initiates the LC Level active low function on the input external input NOTE ony valid for ysb pes with Liquid Check the programming of the digital inputs DigIn 1 8 Cooling option Check Brake acknowledge signal wiring to selected digital input d Check programming of digital input Digin 1 8 520 Brake Brake tripped on brake f
47. ee ay RUN R N TL RUNL OUTPUT STATUS Right rotation Left rotation Standstill 06 F94new_1 Fig 32 Input and output status for edge control 7 3 Performing an Identification Run To get the optimum performance out of your VSD motor combination the VSD must measure the electri cal parameters resistance of stator winding etc of the connected motor See menu 229 Motor ID Run 7 4 Using the Control Panel Memory Data can be copied from the VSD to the memory in the control panel and vice versa To copy all data including parameter set A D and motor data from the VSD to the control panel select Copy to CP 244 Copy to CP To copy data from the control panel to the VSD enter the menu 245 Load from CP and select what you want to copy The memory in the control panel is useful in applica tions with VSDs without a control panel and in applica tions where several variable speed drives have the same setup It can also be used for temporary storage of settings Use a control panel to upload the settings Omron SX inverter manual Main Features 39 from one VSD and then move the control panel to another VSD and download the settings NOTE Load from and copy to the VSD is only possible when the VSD is in stop mode OMRON sxinverTER REV STOP FWD RUN RESET RUN TOCIREM ESC Fig 33 Copy and load parameters betw
48. inputs and outputs of the option cards are connected in the same way as other control signals 32 Control Connections Omron SX inverter manual 6 Applications This chapter contains tables giving an overview of many different applications duties in which it is suita ble to use variable speed drives from OMRON Further on you will find application examples of the most com S mon applications and solutions 6 1 Application overview 6 1 1 Pumps Challenge OM RON SX V solution Menu High start currents require larger fuses and cables Torque control reduces start current Same fuses 331 336 351 Cause stress on equipment and higher energy cost can be used as those required for the motor Dry running cavitation and overheating damage the pump and cause downtime ning at low speed or been stationary for a while Reduces the pump s efficiency Sludge sticks to impeller when pump has been run Pump Curve Protection detects deviation Sends warning or activates safety stop Automatic pump rinsing function pump is set to run at full speed at certain intervals then return to normal speed 411 419 41C1 41C9 362 368 560 640 Motor runs at same speed despite varying demands in pressure flow Energy is lost and equipment stressed PID continuously adapts pressure flow to the level required Sleep function activated when none is needed 320 380 342 354 Process inefficiency due to
49. 2172 When editing values the toggle key can be used to change the sign of the value see section 9 5 page 51 Toggle function Using the toggle function makes it possible to easily step through selected menus in a loop The toggle loop can contain a maximum of ten menus As default the toggle loop contains the menus needed for Quick Function Symbol y ON BLINKING OFF POWER Poweron Power off green TRIP red VSD tripped Warning Limit No trip Setup You can use the toggle loop to create a quick E oo Operation via the Control Panel Omron SX inverter manual menu for the parameters that are most importance to your specific application NOTE Do not keep the Toggle key pressed for more than five seconds without pressing either the or Esc key as this may activate the Loc Rem function of this key instead See menu 217 Add a menu to the toggle loop 1 Go to the menu you want to add to the loop 2 Press the Toggle key and keep it pressed while pressing the key Delete a menu from the toggle loop 1 Go to the menu you want to delete using the tog gle key 2 Press the Toggle key and keep it pressed while pressing the key Delete all menus from the toggle loop 1 Press the Toggle key and keep it pressed while pressing the Esc key 2 Confirm with Enter The menu Preferred view 100 is displayed Default toggle loop Fig
50. 230 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 Modbus format Elnt Max Alarm delay 4162 Sets the delay time between the first occurrence of max alarm condition and after when the alarm is given given f Via x Pr eAl De St ply 0 1s Default 0 1s Range 0 90 5 Communication information Min Pre Alarm 418 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43331 Profibus dot index 169 235 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 1 s Modbus format Elnt 4 LO Max Al ar mDe St py 0 1s Default 0 15 Range 0 90 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43330 Profibus slot index 169 234 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 1 s Modbus format Elnt Min Pre Alarm Margin 4181 With load type Basic 415 used the Min Pre Alarm Margin sets the band under the Normal Load 41B menu that does not generate a pre alarm With load type Load Curve 415 used the Min Pre Alarm Mar gin sets the band under the Load Curve 41C that Max Pre Alarm 417 Max Pre AlarmMargin 4171 With load type Basic 415 used the Max Pre Alarm Margin sets the band above the Normal Load 41B menu that does not generate a pre alarm With load type Load Curve 415 used the Max Pre Alarm Mar gin sets the band above the Load Curve 41C that does not generate a pre alarm The Max Pre Alarm Margin is a percentage of nominal motor torque does not generate a pre alarm The Mi
51. 35 70 95 240 Tightening torque Nm 14 24 14 24 3 6 Thermal protection on the motor Standard motors are normally fitted with an internal fan The cooling capacity of this built in fan is depend ent on the frequency of the motor At low frequency the cooling capacity will be insufficient for nominal loads Please contact the motor supplier for the cool ing characteristics of the motor at lower frequency WARNING Depending on the cooling AN characteristics of the motor the application the speed and the load it may be necessary to use forced cooling on the motor Motor thermistors offer better thermal protection for the motor Depending on the type of motor thermistor fitted the optional PTC input may be used The motor thermistor gives a thermal protection independent of the speed of the motor thus of the speed of the motor fan See the functions Motor It type 231 and Motor 12t current 232 3 7 Motors in parallel It is possible to have motors in parallel as long as the total current does not exceed the nominal value of the VSD The following has to be taken into account when setting the motor data Menu 221 The motors in parallel must have the Motor Voltage same motor voltage Menu 222 The motors in parallel must have the Motor Frequency same motor frequency Menu 223 Add the motor power values for the Motor Power motors in parallel Omron SX inverter ma
52. 43434 minutes 43435 seconds Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43439 hours 43440 minutes 43441 seconds Profibus slot index 170 82 170 83 Profibus slot index 170 88 170 89 170 84 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt 170 90 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt NOTE Timer 1 T1 644 and Timer 2 T1 654 are only visible when Timer Mode is set to Alternate 138 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual Timer 1 Value 649 Timer 1 Value shows actual value of the timer 049 Timerl Value Stpyy 0 00 00 Default 0 00 00 hr min sec Range 0 00 00 9 59 59 Communication information 42921 hours Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 42922 minutes 42923 seconds Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Timer 2 Delay 653 b i mer St pry Del ay 0 00 00 Default 0 00 00 hr min sec Range 0 00 00 9 59 59 Communication information Profibus slot index 168 80 168 81 168 82 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt 11 6 5 Timer2 650 Refer to the descriptions for Timer1 Timer 2 Trig 651 O imer r g St pry off Default Off Same selections as Digital Output 1 menu Selection 541 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43453 hours 43454 minutes 43455 seconds Profibus slot index 170 102 170 103 170 104
53. 75 Effect of transition speed Settle Time Stop 39F The settle stop allows the process to settle after a pump is switched off before the pump control contin ues If an additional pump is stopped D O L Direct On Line or Y A the flow or pressure can still fluctuate due to the rough start stop method This could cause unnecessary starting and stopping of additional pumps During the Settle stop e PID controller is off e the speed is kept at a fixed level after stopping a pump Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43176 Profibus dot index 169 80 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 Modbus format Elnt IF Settle Stop Stop Os Default Os Range 0 999s Communication information Example Max Speed 1500 rom Min Speed 200 rom TransS Start 60 When less additional pumps are needed the speed will be controlled up to min speed 60 x 1500 rom 200 rpm 200 rom 780 rom 980 rom When this speed is reached the additional pump with the highest run time hours will be switched off Speed Actual shut down of pump Master pump Max Trans pe a cece nn Actual Additional pump Flow Pressure Switch off procedure starts Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43175 Profibus slot index 169 79 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 s Modbus format Elnt Fig 76 Transition speed stop Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 107 R
54. 8 Serial Communication 260 This function is to define the communication parame ters for serial communication There are two types of options available for serial communication RS232 485 Modbus RTU and fieldbus modules Profibus DeviceNet and Ethernet For more information see chapter Serial communication and respective option manual Comm Type 261 Select RS232 485 262 or Fieldbus 263 bl Com Type 8 rop RS232 485 Default RS232 485 RS232 485 0 RS232 485 selected Fieldbus 1 Fieldbus selected Profibus DeviceNet or Modbus TCP NOTE Toggling the setting in this menu will perform a soft reset re boot of the Fieldbus module RS232 485 262 Press Enter to set up the parameters for RS232 485 Modbus RTU communication Baud rate 2621 Set the baud rate for the communication NOTE This baud rate is only used for the isolated RS232 485 option 0 paudrate St pry 9600 Default 9600 2400 0 4800 1 9600 2 Selected baud rate 19200 3 38400 4 Address 2622 Enter the unit address for the VSD NOTE This address is only used for the isolated RS232 485 option 80 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual 0 Adaress St pry 1 Default 1 Selection 1 247 Fieldbus 263 Press Enter to set up the parameters for fieldbus com munication 03 Fieldbus St pry Address
55. B 243 Default gt Set A DEFAULT CUSTOM 244 Copyto CP No Copy 245 LoadfromCP No Copy 250 Autoreset 251 No of Trips 0 252 Overtemp Off 253 Overvolt D Off 254 Overvolt G Off 255 Overvolt Off 256 Motor Lost Off 257 Locked Rotor Off 258 Power Fault Off 259 Undervoltage Off 25A Motor It Off 258 Motor Trip 25C PT100 Off 25D PT100 TT Trip 25E PTC Off 25F PTCTT Trip 25G Ext Trip Off 25H Ext Trip TT Trip 251 Com Error Off 25 Com Error TT Trip 25K Min Alarm Off 25L MinAlarmTT Trip 25M Max Alarm Off 25N MaxAlarm TT Trip 250 Over curr F Off 25p Pump Off 250 Over speed Off 25R Est Mot Temp Off 255 Ext Mot TT Trip 25T LC Level Off 25U LC Level TT Trip 260 Serial Com 261 Com Type RS232 485 262 RS232 485 2621 Baudrate 9600 2622 Address 1 263 Fieldbus 2631 Address 62 2632 PrData Mode Basic 2633 Read Write RW 2634 AddPrValue 0 264 Comm Fault 2641 ComFlt Mode Off 2642 ComFlt Time 0 55 265 Ethernet Omron SX inverter manual Menu List 181 DEFAULT CUSTOM DEFAULT CUSTOM
56. Brake SX 4315 EV 520 630 3x 35 240 frame SX 4355 EV 562 630 SX 4400 EV 648 710 3x 35 240 frame SX 4450 EV 744 800 4x 35 240 frame SX 4500 EV 864 1000 SX 4630 EV 1037 1250 6x 35 240 frame SX 4800 EV 1296 1500 1 Values are valid when brake chopper electronics are built in Table 44 Fuses cable cross sections and glands for 690V Nominal Maximum Cable cross section connector range mm for Cable glands clamping range input mm Model value fuse current A A mains motor Brake PE mains motor Brake SX D6090 EV 78 100 E 16 95 16 95 ie SX D6110 EV 94 100 16 70 1027 66 cable entry SX D6132 EV 126 160 35 150 EE A 35 150 16 95 j SX D6160 EV 152 160 16 70 x sl d SX 6200 EV 182 200 35 150 35 240 95 185 35 150 Sx 6250EV 216 250 16 95 REN 16 70 SX 6315 EV 260 300 I 1 2x 35 150 frame SX 6355 EV 324 355 SX 6450 EV 372 400 3x 35 150 frame SX 6500 EV 432 500 SX 6600 EV 520 630 4x 35 150 frame SX 6630 EV 562 630 SX 6710 EV 648 710 6x 35 150 frame SX 6800 EV 744 800 SX 6900 EV 795 900 6x 35 150 frame SX 61K0 EV 864 1000 1 Values are valid when brake chopper electronics are built in Omron SX inverter manual Technical Data 175 176 Technical Data Omron SX inverter manual 14 7 2 Fuses and cable dimensions accordi
57. Deceleration I2t Active I t protection Run Motor runs Tro Tripped Stp Motor is stopped VL Operating at Voltage limit SL Operating at Speed limit CL Operating at Current limit TL Operating at Torque limit OT Operating at Temperature Limit LV Operating at Low Voltage Sby Operating from Standby power sup ply SST Operating Safe Stop is blinking when activated LCL Operating with low cooling liquid level Area E Shows active parameter set and if it is a motor parameter AreaF Shows the setting or selection in the active menu This area is empty at the 1st level and 2nd level menu This area also shows warnings and Omron SX inverter manual Operation via the Control Panel 47 alarm messages 00 Process App St pry Fig 37 Example Ist level menu 0 Motor Data Srep Fig 38 Example 2nd level menu Motor Vo St pry M1 400V Fig 39 Example 3d level menu 4161 Max Alarm St pry 0 1s Fig 40 Example 4th level menu 9 2 2 Indications on the display The display can indicate or if a parameter is out of range In the VSD there are parameters which are dependent on other parameters For example if the speed reference is 500 and the maximum speed value is set to a value below 500 this will be indicated with on the display If the minimum speed value is set over 500 is displayed 9 2 3 LED indicators The symbols on the control panel have the
58. Depends on selected process source 321 e Speed 1 rpm 4 digits ll Other units 3 digits Communication information Timer 2 Value 659 Timer 2 Value shows actual value of the timer DIY I mer Value St pLy 0 00 00 Default 0 00 00 hr min sec Range 0 00 00 9 59 59 Communication information 42924 hours Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 42925 minutes 42926 seconds Profibus slot index 168 83 168 84 168 84 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 31001 Profibus slot index 121 145 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 001 Modbus format Elnt Speed 712 Displays the actual shaft speed peeo Stp rpm Unit rpm Resolution 1 rpm 4 digits Communication information Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 31002 Profibus slot index 121 146 Fieldbus format Int 1 1 rpm Modbus format Int 1 1 rpm 11 7 View Operation Status 700 Menu with parameters for viewing all actual opera tional data such as speed torque power etc 140 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual Torque 713 Displays the actual shaft torque Current 716 Displays the actual output current orque b Stp 0 0 0Nm Unit Nm Unit A Resolution 1Nm Resolution 0 1A Communication information Communication information
59. Left command at 10 rom regardless of RunL or RunR commands Fig 62 shows the function of the Jog command function 40 og peed St py 50rpm Default 50 rpm Range 4 x motor sync speed to 4 x motor sync speed Defined motor sync speed Max 400 nor EE mally max VSD Imax Motor Inom X 100 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43128 Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 95 Profibus slot index 169 32 Fieldbus format Int Modbus format Int Jog Freq Jog com i j j j mand t NG_06 F18 Fig 62 Jog command 11 3 6 Torques 350 Menu with all parameters for torque settings Maximum Torque 351 Sets the maximum torque This Maximum Torque operates as an upper torque limit A Soeed Reference is always necessary to run the motor E 60 Tyor Nm _Pmor w x60 MmorCpm x211 StpEN 120 Default 120 calculated from the motor data Range 0 400 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43141 Profibus slot index 169 45 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 Modbus format Elnt NOTE 100 Torque means Inom Imor The maximum depends on the motor current and VSD max current settings but the absolute maximum adjustment is 400 NOTE The power loss in the motor will increase by the square of the torque when operating above 100 400
60. Min Max Decimals Process 0 3 Speed rpm 0 Maxspeed 0 Torque 0 Maxtorque 0 Shaft Power kW 0 Motor P x4 0 El Power kW 0 Motor P x4 0 Current A 0 Motor x4 1 Output volt V 0 1000 1 Fig 88 Frequency Hz 0 400 1 DC voltage V 0 1250 1 No Description Heatsink temp C 0 100 1 The reference signal passes the Level LO value from PT100_1 2 3 C 100 300 1 1 below positive edge the comparator CAl does not Energy KWh 0 1000000 0 change output stays low A The reference signal passes the Level HI value from dlls k lela 2 2 below positive edge the comparator CAl output is Mains time h 0 65535 0 set high Anin 1 4 0 100 0 132 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual No Description The reference signal passes the Level HI value from 3 above negative edge the comparator CAl does not change output stays high Analogue Comparator 2 Value 614 Function is identical to analogue comparator 1 value The reference signal passes the Level LO value from 4 above negative edge the comparator CA1 is reset output is set low The reference signal passes the Level LO value from 5 below positive edge the comparator CAl does not change output stays low 014 CA2 Value St pry Torque Default Torque Selections Same as in menu 611 The reference signal passes the Level HI value from 6 below positive edge the comparator CAl output is set high Th
61. Modbus format Ulnt Timer 1 Delay 643 This menu is only visible when timer mode is set to delay Timer 1 T1 644 When timer mode is set to Alternate and Timer 1 is enabled this timer will automatically keep on switching according to the independently programmable up and down times The Timer 1 in Alternate mode can be enabled by a digital input or via a virtual connection See Fig 91 Timer 1 T1 sets the up time in the alter nate mode 044 I mer St pry 0 00 00 Default 0 00 00 hr min sec Range 0 00 00 9 59 59 Communication information 43436 hours Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 43437 minutes 43438 seconds 170 85 170 86 Profibus slot index This menu can only be edited as in alternative 2 see section 9 5 page 51 Timer 1 delay sets the time that will be used by the first timer after it is activated Timer 1 can be activated by a high signal on a DigIn that is set to Timer 1 or via a virtual destination 560 Timer 1 T2 645 170 87 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Timer 1 T2 sets the down time in the alternate mode 04 I mer 1Del ay St py 0 00 00 Default 0 00 00 hr min sec Range 0 00 00 9 59 59 Communication information 04 I mer St pry 0 00 00 Default 0 00 00 hr min sec Range 0 00 00 9 59 59 Communication information 43433 hours Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no
62. Mon MaxAlarm Trip Off Warn Normal Soft e The TRP status indication is displayed area D of Mon MinAlarm Trip Off Warn Normal Soft the display Comm error Trip Off Warn Normal Soft Soft Trip PT100 Trip Off Normal Soft e the VSD stops by decelerating to a standstill Deviation Via Option Normal During the deceleration Pump Via Option Normal e The accompanying trip message is displayed including an additional soft trip indicator S before EH m Normal oF the trip time Over curr F On Normal e The Trip LED is blinking Over volt D On Normal e The Warning relay or output is active if selected Over volt G On Normal After standstill is reached Over volt On Normal e The Trip LED is on Over speed On Normal e The Trip relay or output is active if selected Under voltage On Normal LV e The TRP status indication is displayed area D of Power Fault On Normal the display Desat On Normal Apart from the TRIP indicators there are two more DClink error On Normal indicators to show that the inverter is in an abnormal situation Ovolt m cut On Normal Wa rning Over voltage WE VL e The inverter is close to a trip limit Safe stop Warning SST e The Warning relay or output is active if selected Motor PTC On Normal The Trip LED is blinking LC Level ep Nm Normal Soft LCL ante ia Digin e The accompanying warning message is displayed in window 722 Warning Brake On Normal e One of the warning
63. Monitor and Process Protection 400 114 11 4 1 Load Monitor 410 n 11 4 2 Process Protection 420 11 5 I Os and Virtual Connections 500 119 11 5 1 Analogue Inputs 510 11 5 2 Digital Inputs 520 11 5 3 Analogue Outputs 530 11 5 4 Digital Outputs 540 115 5 Relays 550 11 5 6 Virtual Connections 560 11 6 Logical Functions and Timers 600 136 11 6 1 Comparators 610 11 6 2 Logic Output Y 620 11 6 3 Logic Output Z 630 11 6 4 Timerl 640 11 6 5 Timer 650 NEE 11 7 View Operation Status II00T 146 11 7 1 Operation 710 cscs 11 7 2 Status 720 ccc 11 7 3 Stored values 730 11 8 View Trip Log 800 11 8 1 Trip Message log 810 11 8 2 Trip Messages 820 Ion 153 11 8 3 Reset Trip Log 8A0 e 153 11 9 System Data 900 154 11 9 1 VSD Data 920 154 12 Troubleshooting D tenance 157 12 1 Trips warnings and limits iagnoses and Main 12 2 Trip conditions causes and remedial action 158 12 2 1 Technically qualified personnel 158 12 2 2 Opening the variable speed drive 158 12 2 3 Precautions to take with a connected motor 158 12 2 4 Autoreset Tip 158 12 3 Maintenance ENEE 161 13 Options niini ni aiia 13 1 Options for the control panel 13 2 PC Tool software siseses 13 3 Brake Chopper iniciarse pop 13 4 MO Bo
64. Power 690V kW Rated current A Power 690V kW Rated current A SX D6090 EV 108 90 90 75 72 SX D6110 EV 131 110 109 90 87 See SX D6132 EV 175 132 146 110 117 SX D6160EV 210 160 175 132 140 SX 6200 EV 252 200 210 160 168 SX 6250 EV 300 250 250 200 200 SX 6315 EV 360 315 300 250 240 SS SX 6355 EV 450 355 375 315 300 SX 6450 EV 516 450 430 315 344 SX 6500 EV 600 500 500 355 400 Omron SX inverter manual Technical Data 169 Table 35 Typical motor power at mains voltage 690 V Normal duty l Heavy duty l M odel es 120 1 min every 10 min 150 1 min every 10 min Beste Power 690V kW Rated current A Power 690V kW Rated current A SX 6600 EV 720 600 600 450 SX 6630EV 780 630 650 500 520 ve SX 6710 EV 900 710 750 600 600 SX 6800 EV 1032 800 860 650 688 SX 6900 EV 1080 900 900 710 720 SX 61K0 EV 1200 1000 1000 800 800 Available during limited time and as long as allowed by drive temperature 170 Technical Data Omron SX inverter manual 14 2 General electrical specifications Table 36 General electrical specifications General Mains voltage SX Axx EV SX 6 xxx EV Mains frequency Input power factor Output voltage Output frequency Output switching frequency Efficiency at nominal load 230 480V 10 10 500 690V 10 15 45 to 65 Hz 0 95 0 Mains supply voltage 0 400 Hz 3 kHz adjustable 1 5 6 kHz 9
65. Process Val Menu no Menu Default Process Val name Dependent on menu BE Process Val 0 Process value Selection or Integer value of Description Ppor S Speed range selection H Torque 2 Torque Process Ref 3 Process reference Resolution of settings Shaft Power 4 Shaft power The resolution for all range settings described in this El Power 5 Electrical power chapter is 3 significant digits Exceptions are speed Currant 6 Current values which are presented with 4 significant digits Table 19 shows the resolutions for 3 significant digits Output volt 7 Output voltage Frequenc 8 Frequenc Table 19 d 3 2 DC Voltage 9 DC voltage 3 Digit Resolution Heatsink Tmp 10 Heatsink temperature 0 01 9 99 0 01 Motor Temp 11 Motor temperature 10 0 99 9 0 1 VSD Status 12 VSD status 100 999 1 Run Time 13 Run Time 1000 9990 10 Energy 14 Energy 10000 99900 100 Mains Time 15 Mains time 11 1 Preferred View 100 This menu is displayed at every power up During operation the menu 100 will automatically be dis played when the keyboard is not operated for 5 min utes The automatic return function will be switched off when the Toggle and Stop key is pressed simultane ously As default it displays the actual current D7 Dr pm St pry 0 0A Menu 100 Preferred View displays the settings made in menu 110 1st line and 120 2nd line
66. Ref 4 Communication information NOTE Overvoltage control should not be activated if brake chopper is used 424 Over Vo Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43201 Profibus slot index 169 105 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Stop On Default On On 0 Overvoltage control activated Off 1 Overvoltage control off Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43364 Profibus dot index 170 13 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt 11 5 I Os and Virtual Connections 500 Main menu with all the settings of the standard inputs and outputs ofthe VSD 11 5 1 Analogue Inputs 510 Submenu with all settings for the analogue inputs Anin1 Function 511 Sets the function for Analogue input 1 Scale and range are defined by Anln1 Advanced settings 513 An n c Stppy Process Ref Default Process Ref Off O Input is not active MaxSpeed 1 The input acts as an upper speed limit Max Torque 2 The input acts as an upper torque limit NOTE When AnInX Func 0ff the connected signal will still be available for Comparators 610 114 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual Adding analogue inputs If more then one analogue input is set to the same function the values of the inputs can be added together In the following examples we assume that Process Sour
67. SlavePump3 Feedback PRESSURE R SlavePump4 R SlavePump5 R SlavePump6 Pressure Flow 50 PC 2_1 Fig 36 Pressure control with pump control option Pumps in parallel will operate as a flow controller See Fig 35 Pumps in series will operate as a pressure controller see Fig 36 The basic control principle is shown in Fig 37 NOTE Read this instruction manual carefully before commencing installation connecting or working with the variable speed drive with Pump Control FREQUENCY master pump P Add pump Stop pump P on Pi on p2 on P3 on pa on P5 on P6 on FLOW i PRESSURE FLOW PRESSURE TIME 50 PC 3_1 Fig 37 Basic Control principle 42 Main Features Omron SX inverter manual 7 6 2 Fixed MASTER This is the default setting of the Pump Control The SX V controls the Master pump which is always run ning The relay outputs start and stop the other pumps P1 to P6 depending on flow pressure In this configu ration a maximum of 7 pumps can be controlled see Fig 38 To equalize the lifetime of the additional pumps it is possible to select the pumps depending on the run time history of each pump NG_50 PC 4_1 See menu 393 Select Drive 39H to 39 N Run Time 1 6 Pump 554 to 55C Relays
68. The description of installation in this chapter complies with the EMC standards and the Machine Directive Select cable type and screening according to the EMC requirements valid for the environment where the VSD is installed 3 1 Before installation Read the following checklist and think through your application before installation e External or internal control e Long motor cables gt 100m refer to section Long motor cables e Motors in parallel refer to menu 213 e Functions e Suitable VSD size in proportion to the motor appli cation e Mount separately supplied option boards accord ing to the instructions in the appropriate option manual If the VSD is temporarily stored before being con nected please check the technical data for environ mental conditions If the VSD is moved from a cold storage room to the room where it is to be installed condensation can form on it Allow the VSD to become fully acclimatised and wait until any visible condensation has evaporated before connecting the mains voltage 3 2 Cable connections 3 2 1 Mains cables Dimension the mains and motor cables according to local regulations The cable must be able to carry the VSD load current Recommendations for selecting mains cables e To fulfil EMC purposes it is not necessary to use screened mains cables e Use heat resistant cables 60 C or higher e Dimension the cables and fuses in accordance with local
69. This makes it possible to enter negative values Example When you press Next the 4 will blink ACC I me Sto 4 00s Blinking A Press Enter to save the setting and Esc to leave the edit mode 9 6 Copy current parameter to all sets When a parameter is displayed press the Enter key for 5 seconds Now the text To all sets is displayed Press Enter to copy the setting for current parameter to all sets 9 7 Programming example This example shows how to program a change of the Acc Time set from 2 0 s to 4 0 The blinking cursor indicates that a change has taken place but is not saved yet If at this moment the power fails the change will not be saved Use the ESC Prev Next or the Toggle keys to pro ceed and to go to other menus Omron SX inverter manual Operation via the Control Panel 51 DO Ur PM Menu100 appears Stony 0 0Al after power up UU MAIN UP Press Next for menu Stony 200 DO Process Press Next for menu Stony 300 D et View Re Press Enter for menu Story 310 run OP Press Next two times Story for menu 330 ACC I me Press Enter for menu Stoy 2 00s 13311 A ACC IME keep A keypressed sg 2 00s until desired value has been reached A Blinking Save the changed value by pressing Enter ACC Stony 4 00s 3 Fig 45 Programming example ul N Operation via the Control Panel Omron SX inverter manual 10 Serial communi
70. This output or relay can control the mechanical e Brake Engage Time 33E brake e Brake Wait Time 33F The correct time setting depends on the maximum Dr nelease load and the properties of the mechanical brake Dur St PH 0 00s ing the brake release time it is possible to apply extra holding torque by setting a start speed reference with Default 0 00s the function start speed 33D Range 0 00 3 00 s Brake release Brake wait Brake engage n time 33C time 33F time 33E Start Release Speed 33D LT Mechanical Open Closed i I A I I i A 1 Brake Rel SE GEN Off I Action must take place within these time intervals Fig 58 Brake Output functions Release Speed 33D The release speed only operates with the brake func tion brake release 33C The release speed is the ini NOTE This function is designed to operate a mechanical tial speed reference during the brake release time brake via the digital outputs or relays set to brake function controlling a mechanical brake D Release Spd St ply Orpm Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 91 Default 0 rpm Range 4x Sync Speed to 4x Sync 4xmotor sync speed 1500 rpm for 1470 pepeng on rpm motor Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43113 Profibus slot index 169 17 Fieldbus format Int 1 1 rpm Modbus format Int 1 1 rpm
71. a connected motor If work must be carried out on a connected motor or on the driven machine the mains volt age must always be disconnected from the variable speed drive first Wait at least 5 minutes before starting work Short circuits The Inverter has high voltage parts inside which if short circuited might cause damage to itself or other property Place covers on the openings or take other precautions to make sure that no metal objects such as cutting bits or lead wire scraps go inside when installing and wiring Earth leakage current This variable speed drive has an earth leakage current which does exceed 3 5 mA AC Therefore the minimum size of the protective earth conductor must comply with the local safety regulations for high leakage current equipment which means that according the standard IEC61800 5 1 the protective earth connection must be assured by one of follow ing conditions 1 Use a protective conductor with a cable cross section of at least 10 mm for copper Cu or 16 mm for aluminium Al 2 Use an additional PE wire with the same cable cross section as the used original PE and mains supply wiring Residual current device RCD compatibility This product cause a DC current in the protective conductor Where a residual current device RCD is used for protection in case of direct or indirect contact only a Type B RCD is allowed on the supply side of this product Use RCD of 300 mA minimum
72. a non dissipating wall must be maintained Valid if free space on opposite side Table 4 Mounting and cooling CEA Stee sane 6090 6250 HIEL cabinet a 200 100 SX V b 200 0 mm c 0 0 d 0 0 a 100 100 SX V wall wall one b 100 0 side 0 0 mm E d 0 0 NOTE When a 4160 4800 or 6315 61K0 model is placed between two walls a minimum distance at each side of 200 mm must be maintained 2 2 2 Mounting schemes Membrane cable gland M60 922 50 SE We Fig 8 SX V 400V Model 4090 including cable interface for mains motor and communication Omron SX inverter manual Mounting 13 Cable dimensions 27 66 mm 922 50 Fig 9 SX V 400V Model 4110 to 4132 E SX V 690V Model 6090 to 6160 F69 including cable interface for mains motor and communication 2 3 Cabinet mounting 2 3 1 Cooling If the variable speed drive is installed in a cabinet the rate of airflow supplied by the cooling fans must be tak en into consideration Table 5 Flow rates cooling fans Frame SX V Model Flow rate m hour E 4090 510 F 4110 4132 F69 6090 6160 G 4160 4200 1020 H 4220 4250 800 1600 H69 6200 6355 4315 4400 2400 169 64
73. a rated output current in normal duty of 175A Software 922 Shows the software version number of the VSD Fig 99 gives an example of the version number d ortware Stp V 4 20 Fig 99 Example of software version 31038 software version Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31039 option version Profibus slot index 121 182 183 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Table 25 Information for Modbus and Profibus number software version Bit Description 7 0 minor 13 8 major release 00 V release version 01 P pre release version 10 B Beta version 11 a Alpha version 15 14 Table 26 Information for Modbus and Profibus number option version Bit Description 7 0 minor 15 8 major V 4 20 Version of the Software NOTE It is important that the software version displayed in menu 920 is the same software version number as the software version number written on the title page of this instruction manual If not the functionality as described in this manual may differ from the functionality of the VSD 148 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual Unit name 923 Option to enter a name of the unit for service use or customer identity The function enables the user to define a name with 12 symbols Use the Prev and Next key to move the cursor to the required position Then use the and keys to scroll in th
74. and Rotation The speed direction can be controlled by e RunR RunL commands on the control panel e RunR RunL commands on the terminal strip terminals 1 22 e Via the serial interface options e The parameter sets Fig 48 Rotation 62 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual In this menu you set the general rotation for the motor 9 Rotation St pry R L Default R L Speed direction is limited to right rota R 1 tion The input and key RunL are disa bled L 2 Speed direction is limited to left rotation The input and key RunR are disabled RAL 3 Both speed directions allowed Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43019 Profibus slot index 168 178 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt 11 2 2 Remote Signal Level Edge 21A In this menu you select the way to control the inputs for RunR RunL Stop and Reset that are operated via the digital inputs on the terminal strip The inputs are default set for level control and will be active as long as the input is made and kept high When edge con trol is selected the input will be activated by the low to high transition of the input A Level Edge St ply Level Default Level The inputs are activated or deactivated by a continuous high or low signal Is commonly used if for example a PLC is used to operate the VSD Level 0 The inputs are activated
75. are using different motors M1 to M4 the set will be changed when the motor is stopped elec e Stpry A Default A Selection A B C D DigIn Com Option A 0 B 1 Fixed selection of one of the 4 parameter C 2 setsA B CorD D 3 Parameter set is selected via a digital DigIn 4 input Define which digital input in menu 520 Digital inputs Parameter set is selected via serial com Com 5 SE munication The parameter set is set via an option Option 6 Only available if the option can control the selection Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43022 Profibus slot index 168 181 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 71 The active set can be viewed with function 721 FI status NOTE Parameter set cannot be changed during run if this also would imply a change of the motor set M2 M4 Copy Set 242 This function copies the content of a parameter set into another parameter set Load Default Values Into Set 243 With this function three different levels factory set tings can be selected for the four parameter sets When loading the default settings all changes made in the software are set to factory settings This function also includes selections for loading default settings to the four different Motor Data Sets DeTauit gt se
76. automatically measured See Autoset Alarm 41A and Normal Load 41B about setting the nominal load reference The load curve mode uses an interpolated curve with 9 load values at 8 equal speed intervals This curve is populated by a test run with a real load This can be used with any smooth load curve including constant load Communication information Alarm Start Delay 414 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43323 Profibus slot index 169 227 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Load Max Alarm LJ Basic Min Alarm Load curve Speed This parameter is used if for example you want to Fig 77 override an alarm during the start up procedure Sets the delay time after a run command after which 2 oad Type the alarm may be given St pry Basic e f Ramp Alarm On The start delay begins after a RUN command Default Basic e If Ramp Alarm Off The start delay begins after the Uses a fixed maximum and minimum load acceleration ramp Basic 0 level over the full speed range Can be used in situations where the torque is independ C O ent of the speed Aid D St ar ray 2 Load 1 Uses the measured actual load characteris PLY S Curve tic of the process over the speed range Default 2s Communication information Range 0 3600 s Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 43325 Communication information Profibus
77. be erased and a new registration period will start nese RAUNT mM Stp No Default No No 0 Yes 1 Communication information Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 7 Profibus slot index 0 6 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt NOTE After reset the setting automatically reverts to No Mains time 732 Displays the total time that the VSD has been con nected to the mains supply This timer cannot be Run Mode Unit h m s hours minutes seconds Range Oh Om 0s 65535h 59m 59s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31028 hours 31029 minutes 31030 seconds reset Mains Time Stp h m s Unit h m s hours minutes seconds Range Oh Om 05 65535h 59m 59s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31031 hours 31032 minutes 31033 seconds Profibus slot index 121 172 121 173 121 174 Profibus slot index 121 175 121 176 121 177 Fieldbus format Modbus format Ulnt 1 1h m s Ulnt 1 1h m s Fieldbus format Modbus format Ulnt 1 1h m s Ulnt 1 1h m s NOTE At 65535 h 59 m the counter stops It will not revert to Oh Om Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 145 Energy 733 Displays the total energy consumption since the last energy reset 7331 took place message
78. by a transition for Run and Reset from low to high for Stop from high to low Edge 1 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43020 Profibus slot index 168 179 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt comply with the Machine Directive if the inputs CAUTION Level controlled inputs DO NOT are directly used to start and stop the machine NOTE Edge controlled inputs can comply with the Machine Directive see the Chapter 8 page 45 if the inputs are directly used to start and stop the machine 11 2 3 Mains supply voltage 21B voltage used Wrong setting might damage WARNING This menu must be set according AN to the VSD product lable and the supply the VSD or brake resistor In this menu the nominal mains supply voltage con nected to the VSD can be selected The setting will be valid for all parameter sets The default setting Not defined is never selectable and is only visible until a new value is selected Once the supply voltage is set this selection will not be affected by the Load Default command 243 Brake chopper activation level is adjusted using the setting of 21B NOTE The setting is affected by the Load from CP command 245 and if loading parameter file via EmoSoftCom B Supply Volts Stppy Not defined Default Not defined Not Defined 0 Inverter default value used O
79. cables e Use screened cables according to specification in table 7 Use symmetrical shielded cable three phase conductors and a concentric or otherwise symmetrically constructed PE conductor and a shield e When the conductivity of the cable PE conductor is lt 50 of the conductivity of the phase conductor a separate PE conductor is required e Use heat resistant cables 60 C or higher e Dimension the cables and fuses in accordance with the nominal output current of the motor See table 42 page 174 e Keep the motor cable between VSD and motor as short as possible Omron SX inverter manual Installation 17 e The screening must be connected with a large contact surface of preferable 360 and always at both ends to the motor housing and the VSD housing When painted mounting plates are used do not be afraid to scrape away the paint to obtain as large contact surface as possible at all mounting points for items such as saddles and the bare cable screening Relying just on the connection made by the screw thread is not sufficient NOTE It is important that the motor housing has the same earth potential as the other parts of the machine e The litz ground connection see fig 16 is only nec essary if the mounting plate is painted All the varia ble speed drives have an unpainted back side and are therefore suitable for mounting on an unpainted mounting plate Connect the motor cables according
80. decreases PID settings according to menus 382 to 385 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43154 Profibus slot index 169 58 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt PID P Gain 383 Setting the P gain for the PID controller PID H Gain St ply 1 0 Default 1 0 Range 0 0 30 0 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43156 Profibus slot index 169 60 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 1 Fig 66 Closed loop PID control PID Time 384 Setting the integration time for the PID controller DA PID ime St ply 1 00s Default 1 00s Range 0 01 300s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43157 Profibus slot index 169 61 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 01 s Modbus format Elnt Process PID D Time 385 Setting the differentiation time for the PID controller O PID D I me St ply 0 00s Default 0 00 s Range 0 00 30s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43158 Profibus slot index 169 62 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 01 s Modbus format Elnt Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 99 PID sleep functionality This function is controlled via a wait delay and a sepa rate wake up margin condition With this function it is possible to put the VSD in sleep m
81. e Autoreset 5 e Within 10 minutes 6 trips occur Off 0 Off 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43072 Profibus slot index 168 231 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 s Modbus format Elnt NOTE An auto reset is delayed by the remaining ramp time Overvolt D 253 Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone When the time delay has elapsed the alarm will be reset if the function is active e At the 6th trip there is no Autoreset because the Nervo L Autoreset trip log contains 5 trips already St PEN off e To reset apply a normal reset set the reset input Default Off high to low and high again to maintain the Autore set function The counter is reset Off 0 Off 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s NO o rips St PLY 0 Communication information Default 0 no Autoreset Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43075 Range 0 10 attempts Profibus slot index 168 234 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 s Communication information Modbus format Eint Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43071 Profibus slot index 168 230 Fieldbusformt Sum Modbus format Ulnt NOTE An auto reset is delayed by the remaining ramp time NOTE An auto reset is delayed by the remaining ramp time Overvolt G 254 Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone When t
82. ee E N C is opened when the relay is active E SEH 42 VDC relay output 33 N O1 valid for all relays l l max N O is closed when the relay is active valid for all relays Terminal X3 41 N C2 RAT Rin ctv en the a O ypc layout 43 N O2 a or a EE Omron SX inverter manual Technical Data 179 180 Technical Data Omron SX inverter manual 15 Menu List 100 Preferred View 10 let Une Process Val 120 2nd Line Current 200 Main Setup 210 Operation 211 Language English 212 Select Motor M1 213 Drive Mode V Hz 214 Ref Control Remote 215 Run Stp Ctrl Remote 216 Reset Ctrl Remote 217 Local Rem Off 2171 LocRefCtrl Standard 2172 LocRunCtrl Standard 218 Lock Code 0 219 Rotation R L 214 Level Edge Level 218 Supply Volts Not Defined 220 Motor Data 221 Motor Volts Unom V 222 Motor Freq 50Hz 223 Motor Power Prom W 224 Motor Curr Inom A 225 Motor Speed Nmor rem 226 Motor Poles 227 Motor Cos SC on nom 228 Motor Vent Self 229 Motor ID Run Off 224 Motor Sound F 228 Encoder Off 22C Enc Pulses 1024 22D Enc Speed Orpm 230 Mot Protect 231 Mot It Type Trip 232 Mot I t Curr 100 233 MotltTime 605 234 Thermal Prot Off 235 Motor Class F 140 C 236 PT100 Inputs 237 Motor PTC Off 240 Set Handling 241 Select Set A 242 Copy Set A gt
83. ege eege Eed Ae e 62 PTA A EAE EEEE TETEE OEE 63 Long motor ablesen Rss 19 Low Voltage Directive ennesenenenneneneneseenenenenenenenenenen 9 Lower Badia 107 Lower Band Limit oooononcocnnconnnonncconnconnnnonncnnn non nennen 109 M Machine Directive ccccccsscessessesscescecsecssessecssessececeseens 9 Main menu ur a ie ma ce adie ees 50 Mains supply sii 17 24 27 Maintenance A 161 Matis cables cti 17 Manufacturer s certificate ccccccccsscessessesscesseesseseeceeeseenee 9 E E 89 95 96 Memory EE 40 Menu O 59 120 aii 60 EE 60 IER EE 60 ER 60 213 EE 60 LEE 61 IER 61 DIOR A 61 BIN EE 62 IRAK 63 ENK EE 63 A EENES EE ETEN SENEE EEEIEE 63 220 EE 64 IER 64 TE 65 223 EE E 65 EE 65 IER 65 DI A da 65 SR E EEEE AECE EEEE 66 EE 66 CAA EE 66 IER 67 EE 68 A EE 68 QQ DD iii EES 68 2350 tegen ei scher eck a de 69 2B 1 iia 69 EE EE 69 E EE 70 234 iria 70 ee eelere eeh 71 RE 71 EE 71 QAO eege EE A Rees 72 CAD eege Ger cdkedece RRS 72 RE 73 DAB gt ei eege AA e lecciones 73 DAA iran 74 DAS see r OAT E ANA 74 190 Omron SX inverter manual EE 75 EE 75 EE EE 75 EE 75 EE 76 OSG RE oat EEE EUR DE 76 EE 76 CLE ae eet enters ent erro aaa eer 76 EE 76 EE 77 Eben 77 EE 77 O E E A 77 EE 77 EE 78 Eege 78 EE 78 EE 78 E EE 78 E EE 79 A EE 79 EE 79 A a N Kaan 74 79 EE 79 A 79 O50 REISE RR EEEE 80 A E a RA esha 80 CLAS en ee eu Ne 80 EE 80 EE EE 80 EE 81 EE
84. equipment 10 GIOSSAN Arsen 10 Abbreviations and evmbols A 10 Det Pletgen en i Gato ewes 10 MOUNTING age atime 11 Lifting instructions 11 Stand alone unten 12 COOING ene Acad 13 Mounting schemes E 13 Cabinet mounting uneennennen 14 Cooling nenne 14 Mounting schemes EE 14 Installation cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 17 Before Inestallation 17 Cable Connectlons nn 17 Mains Cables ccccesssssscsssssscsssesssesssssssseessseees 17 Motor cables ica 17 Connect motor and mains cables 19 Cable specifications esee Stripping lengths AA Dimension of cables and fUSES eee Tightening torque for mains and motor cables 21 Thermal protection on the motor 21 Motors in parallel 21 Getting Started ees 23 Connect the mains and motor cables 23 Mains cables Motor cables Using the function keys A 24 Remote control eseceesesescsseecsssessseessesesesseseeees 24 Connect control cables sssr 24 Switch on the malns Set the Motor Data Run theVSD aaa Hear Local control esoe deren Switch on the malns Select manual control Set the Motor Data Enter a Reference Value 25 R nithe VSD u a ara 25 Control Connections ecse 27 Control DOAN anna nennen 27 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 5 1 5 5 2 5 5 3 5 5 4 5 5 5 5 5 6 5 6 6 6 1 6 1 1 6 1 2 6 1 3 6 1 4 71 7 1 1 7 1 2 7 1 3 7 1 4 7 1 5 7 1 6 7 2 1 3 7 4 7 5 7 5 1 8 1 8 2 9 1 9 2 9 2 1 9 2 2 9 2 3 9 2 4 9 2 5 9 2 6
85. following functions gt Run Trip Power Green Red Green Fig 41 LED indications Table 16 LED indication Table 16 LED indication RUN Motor shaft Motor speed Motor increase green rotates decrease stopped NOTE If the control panel is built in the back light of the display has the same function as the Power LED in Table 16 Blank panel LEDs 9 2 4 Control keys The control keys are used to give the Run Stop or Reset commands directly As default these keys are disabled set for remote control Activate the control keys by selecting Keyboard in the menus Ref Control 214 and Reset Ctrl 216 If the Enable function is programmed on one of the digital inputs this input must be active to allow Run Stop commands from the control panel Table 17 Control keys gives a start with left rotation REV RUN L SC storvneser ng Ae RESET P RUN R gives a start with right rotation NOTE It is not possible to simultaneously activate the Run Stop commands from the keyboard and remotely from the terminal strip terminals 1 22 9 2 5 The Toggle and Loc Rem Key This key has two functions Toggle and switching between Loc Rem function Belial Press one second to use the toggle function Press and hold the toggle key for more than five sec onds to switch between Local and Remote function depending on the settings in 2171 and
86. given The starting point is always the default setting factory of the VSD Omron SX inverter manual Main Features 37 Default settings of the Run Stop Enable Reset functions The default settings are shown in Fig 28 In this exam ple the VSD is started and stopped with Digln 2 anda reset after trip can be given with Digln 8 e ee noo wn K RunR Reseti___ 2 24V _ If a Fig 28 Default setting Run Reset commands The inputs are default set for level control The rotation is determined by the setting of the digital inputs Enable and Stop functions Both functions can be used separately or simultane ously The choice of which function is to be used depends on the application and the control mode of the inputs Level Edge 21A NOTE In Edge mode at least one digital input must be programmed to stop because the Run commands are otherwise only able to start the VSD Enable Input must be active HI to allow any Run signal If the input is made LOW the output of the VSD is immedi ately disabled and the motor will coast CAUTION If the Enable function is not N programmed to a digital input it is considered to be active internally Stop If the input is low then the VSD will stop according to the selected stop mode set in menu 33B Stop Mode Fig 29 shows the function of the Enable and the Stop input and the Stop Mode Decel 33B To run t
87. iia addins 13 5 Output Coll Sii een 13 6 Serial communication and fieldbus 164 13 7 Standby supply board option 164 13 8 Safe Stop option 165 13 9 Crane option board ENEE 167 13 10 ENCON ar are 167 1311 CHL e A AR RE 167 14 Technical Data 169 14 1 Electrical specifications related to model 169 14 2 General electrical specifications 171 14 3 Operation at higher temperatures sses 172 14 4 Dimensions and Weights EE 173 14 5 Environmental conditions 174 14 6 Fuses cable cross sections and glands 174 14 6 1 According IEC ratings 174 14 6 2 Fuses and cable dimensions according NEMA ratings 14 7 Controlsionals 15 MenuList Omron SX inverter manual 1 Introduction Omron SX V is used most commonly to control and protect pump and fan applications that put high demands on flow control process uptime and low maintenance costs It can also be used for e g com pressors and blowers The used motor control method is V Hz control Several options are available listed in that enable you to customize the variable speed drive for your specific needs Users This instruction manual is intended for e installation engineers e maintenance engineers e operators e service engineers Motors The variable speed drive is suitable for use with stand ard 3 phase asynchronous motors Under certain conditions it is possible to use other types o
88. interface plate from the VSD housing 2 Put the cables through the glands 3 Strip the cable according to Table 8 4 Connect the stripped cables to the respective motor terminal 5 Put the cable interface plate in place and secure with the fixing screws 6 Tighten the EMC gland with good electrical contact to the motor and brake chopper cable screens Placing of motor cables Keep the motor cables as far away from other cables as possible especially from control signals The mini mum distance between motor cables and control cables is 300 mm Avoid placing the motor cables in parallel with other cables The power cables should cross other cables at an angle of 90 Long motor cables If the connection to the motor is longer than 100 m 40 m for models 003 018 it is possible that capacitive current peaks will cause tripping at overcurrent Using output coils can prevent this Contact the supplier for appropriate coils Switching in motor cables Switching in the motor connections is not advisable In the event that it cannot be avoided e g emergency or maintenance switches only switch if the current is zero If this is not done the VSD can trip as a result of current peaks 3 3 Connect motor and mains cables SX D4090 EV V to SX D4132 EV and SX D6090 EV 690V to SX D4160 EV To simplify the connection of thick motor and mains cables to the VSD model SX D4090 EV to SX D4132 EV and SX D6
89. marked with a lock symbol in the display NOTE If you try to change a function during operation that only can be changed when the motor is stopped the message Stop First is displayed 9 5 Editing values in a menu Most values in the second row in a menu can be changed in two different ways Enumerated values like the baud rate can only be changed with alternative 1 0 Bauar a e Sp 38400 Alternative 1 When you press the or keys to change a value the cursor is blinking to the left in the display and the value is increased or decreased when you press the appro priate key If you keep the or keys pressed the value will increase or decrease continuously When you keep the key pressed the change speed will increase The Toggle key is used to change the sign of the entered value The sign of the value will also change when zero is passed Press Enter to confirm the value ACC ime Sto 2 00s A Blinking Alternative 2 Press the or key to enter edit mode Then press the Prev or Next key to move the cursor to the right most position of the value that should be changed The cursor will make the selected character blink Move the cursor using the Prev or Next keys When you press the or keys the character at the cursor position will increase or decrease This alternative is suitable when you want to make large changes i e from 2 sto 400 s To change the sign of the value press the toggle key
90. means that the content of parameter set A is copied into parameter set B NOTE If Factory is selected the message Sure is displayed Press the key to display Yes and then Enter to confirm NOTE The parameters in menu 220 Motor data are not affected by loading defaults when restoring parameter sets A D 72 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual Copy All Settings to Control Panel 244 All the settings can be copied into the control panel including the motor data Start commands will be ignored during copying A 4 opy o 8 St ply No Copy Default No Copy o No Copy Nothing will be copied m Copy Copy all settings Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43024 Profibus slot index 168 183 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt NOTE The actual value of menu 310 will not be copied into control panel memory set Load Settings from Control Panel 245 This function can load all four parameter sets from the control panel to the VSD Parameter sets from the source VSD are copied to all parameter sets in the tar get VSD i e A to A B to B C to C and D to D Start commands will be ignored during loading 5 oad from CF 8 Stp No Copy Default No Copy No Copy 0 Nothing will be loaded A 1 Data from parameter set A is loaded B 2 Data from para
91. moment any one of the four parameter sets can be activated during Run or Stop via the dig ital inputs or the control panel and menu 241 Each parameter set can be selected externally via a digital input Parameter sets can be changed during operation and stored in the control panel NOTE The only data not included in the parameter set is Motor data 1 4 entered separately language communication settings selected set local remote and keyboard locked Define parameter sets When using parameter sets you first decide how to select different parameter sets The parameter sets can be selected via the control panel via digital inputs or via serial communication All digital inputs and vir tual inputs can be configured to select parameter set The function of the digital inputs is defined in the menu 520 Fig 27 shows the way the parameter sets are acti vated via any digital input configured to Set Ctrl 1 or Set Ctrl 2 Parameter Set A Run Stop SetB Torques Set C Set D Controllers Limits Prot Max Alarm 11 24 V Pa Set Ctrl Set Ctrl2 fer o er NGO6 FO3_1 Fig 27 Selecting the parameter sets Select and copy parameter set The parameter set selection is done in menu 241 Select Set First select the main set in menu 241 normally A Adjust all setti
92. of 4 pumps can be controlled with the standard SX V variable speed drive If WO Board options are installed a maximum of 7 pumps can be controlled The I O Board can also be used as a general extended WC The Pump Control function is used to control a number of drives pumps fans etc with a maximum of 3 additional drives per O board connected of which one is always driven by the SX V Other names for this kind of controllers are Cascade controller or Hydrophore controller Depending on the flow pressure or temperature addi tional pumps can be activated via the appropriate sig nals by the output relays of the SX V and or the I O Board The system is developed in such a way that one SX V will be the master of the system Select relay on the control board or on an option board The relays are set to functions for controlling pumps In the pictures in this section the relays are named R Function e g R SlavePump1 which means a relay on the control board or on an option board set to function SlavePump1 R SlavePump1 R SlaveP 2 Set FLOW A Feedback R SlavePump3 FLOW gt R SlavePump4 R SlavePump5 R SlavePump6 Pressure Flow 50 PC 1_1 Fig 35 Flow control with pump control option All additional pumps can be activated via a VSD soft starter Y A or D O L switches R SlavePump1 Set R SlavePump2 R
93. per hour ft3 h 11 Cubic feet per hour oe u User 12 User defined unit F Anin 0 Function of analogue input E g via PID control 330 Communication information Speed 1 Speed as process reference PT100 3 Temperature as process reference Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43303 F Speed 4 Function of speed Profibus slot index 169 207 F Bus 6 Function of communication reference Fieldbus format Ulnt Frequency 7 Frequency as process reference Modbus format Ulnt 1 Only when Drive mode 213 is set to Speed or V Hz NOTE When PT100 is selected use PT100 channel 1 on the PTC PT100 option board NOTE If Speed Torque or Frequency is chosen in menu 321 Proc Source menus 322 328 are hidden NOTE The motor control method depends on the User defined Unit 323 This menu is only displayed if User is selected in menu 322 The function enables the user to define a unit with six symbols Use the Prev and Next key to move the cursor to required position Then use the and keys to scroll down the character list Confirm the character by moving the cursor to the next position by pressing the Next key No for serial No for serial selection of drive mode 213 regardless of selected Character camm Character comi process source 321 Spac
94. separate man ual 13 10PTC PT100 Order number Description 01 3876 08 PTC PT100 2 0 option board The PTC PT100 2 0 option board for connecting motor thermistors to the VSD is described in a sepa rate manual Omron SX inverter manual Options 167 168 Options Omron SX inverter manual 14 Technical Data 14 1 Electrical specifications related to model Table 34 Typical motor power at mains voltage 400 V Normal duty l Heavy duty l TOE Max output 120 1 min every 10 min 150 1 min every 10 min GER current A Power 400V Rated current Power 400V Rated current kw A kW A SX D4090 EV 210 90 175 75 140 E SX D4110 EV 252 110 210 90 168 SX D4132 EV 300 132 250 110 200 SX 4160 EV 360 160 300 132 240 SX 4200 EV 450 200 375 160 300 S SX 4220EV 516 220 430 200 344 i SX 4250 EV 600 250 500 220 400 SX 4315 EV 720 315 600 250 SX 4355 EV 780 355 650 315 520 SX 4400 EV 900 400 750 355 600 SX 4450 EV 1032 450 860 400 688 SX 4500 EV 1200 500 1000 450 800 SX 4630 EV 1440 630 1200 500 960 SX 4800 EV 1800 800 1500 630 1200 S Available during limited time and as long as allowed by drive temperature Table 35 Typical motor power at mains voltage 690 V Normal duty l Heavy duty l Model SE 120 1 min every 10 min 150 1 min every 10 min Keesen
95. signals such as RS232 RS485 Profibus etc Relay Relay contacts 0 250 VAC can switch highly induc tive loads auxiliary relay lamp valve brake etc A Maximum wire size Wee Cable type Analogue Rigid cable Screened 0 14 2 5 mm Digital Flexible cable Be Screened Data 0 14 1 5 mm Screened Cable with ferrule Relay 0 25 1 5 mm Not screened Example The relay output from a variable speed drive which controls an auxiliary relay can at the moment of switching form a source of interference emission for a measurement signal from for example a pressure sensor Therefore it is advised to separate wiring and screening to reduce disturbances 5 5 3 Screening For all signal cables the best results are obtained if the screening is connected to both ends the VSD side and the at the source e g PLC or computer See Fig 26 It is strongly recommended that the signal cables be allowed to cross mains and motor cables at a 90 30 Control Connections Omron SX inverter manual angle Do not let the signal cable go in parallel with the 5 5 4 Single ended or double ended mains and motor cable connection In principle the same measures applied to motor cables must be applied to all control signal cables in accordance with the EMC Directives For all signal cables as mentioned in section 5 5 2 the best results are obtained if the screening is connecte
96. supply The variable speed drives can be modified for an IT mains supply non earthed neutral check manual and contract your supplier in case of doubt EMC Regulations In order to comply with the EMC Directive it is absolutely necessary to follow the installation instructions All installation descriptions in this manual follow the EMC Directive Transport To avoid damage keep the variable speed drive in its original packaging during transport This packaging is specially designed to absorb shocks during transport Handling the inverter Installation commissioning dismounting taking measurements etc of or on the variable speed drive may only be carried out by personnel technically qualified for the task The installation must be carried out in accordance with local standards OVS Gei Ge Omron SX inverter manual Condensation If the variable speed drive is moved from a cold storage room to a room where it will be installed condensation can occur This can result in sensitive components becoming damp Do not connect the mains voltage until all visible dampness has evaporated Grounding the inverter Be sure to ground the unit Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock or fire Power factor capacitors for improving cos Remove all capacitors from the motor and the motor outlet Incorrect connection The variable speed drive is not protected against inc
97. the Com keyboard or the serial communication RS485 Fieldbus The command comes from an option Option 6 Only available if the option can control the reset command Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43016 Profibus slot index 168 175 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 61 Local Remote key function 217 The Toggle key on the keyboard see section 9 2 5 page 48 has two functions and is activated in this menu As default the key is just set to operate as a Toggle key that moves you easily through the menus in the toggle loop The second function of the key allows you to easily swap between Local and normal opera tion set up via 214 and 215 of the VSD Local mode can also be activated via a digital input If both 2171 and 2172 is set to Standard the function is disabled ocke r Stpry Standard Default Standard Standard 0 Local reference control set via 214 Remote 1 Local reference control via remote Keyboard 2 Local reference control via keyboard Com 3 Local reference control via communication Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43009 Profibus slot index 168 168 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt ockunCtr St ply Standard Default Standard Standard 0 Local Run Stop contro
98. the safety limit an error warning message is displayed In order to avoid any possibly dangerous situations the inverter sets itself into a stop Mode called Trip and the cause of the trip is shown in the display Trips will always stop the VSD Trips can be divided into normal and soft trips depending on the setup Trip Limits e The inverter is limiting torque and or frequency to avoid a trip e The Limit relay or output is active if selected e The Trip LED is blinking e One of the Limit status indications is displayed area D of the display Table 27 List of trips and warnings Type see menu 250 Autoreset Normal trips are Trip Warnin Trip Warning default For normal trips the VSD stops immediately p g Selections Normal indicators i messages i e the motor coasts naturally to a standstill For soft Soft Area D trips the VSD stops by ramping down the speed i e Motor et Trip Off Limit Normal Soft Zt the motor decelerates to a standstill Z PTC Trip Off Normal Soft Norma Trip Motor lost Trip Off N e The VSD stops immediately the motor coasts to Se np SE naturally to a standstill Locked rotor Trip Off Normal e The Trip relay or output is active if selected Ext trip Via Digln Normal Soft e The Trip LED is on Ext Mot Temp Via Digln Normal Soft e The accompanying trip message is displayed
99. the maximum flow pressure is then limited to the maximum pump power of the remaining pumps Omron SX inverter manual Main Features 43 feedback inputs NG_50 PC 6_1 R SlavePump3 R SlavePump2 R SlavePump1 DI Pump1Feedb DI Pump2Feedb DI Pump3Feedb See menu 529 to 52H Digital Input 554 to 55C Relay Fig 40 Feedback Status input 7 6 5 Failsafe operation Some pump systems must always have a minimum flow or pressure level even if the frequency inverter is tripped or damaged So at least 1 or 2 or maybe all additional pumps must keep running after the inverter operation can be obtained by using the NC contacts of the pump control relays These can be programmed for each individual additional pump In this example pumps P5 and P6 will run at maximum power if the inverter fails or is powered down is powered down or tripped This kind of safe pump R SlavePump6 R SlavePump5 R SlavePump4 R SlavePump3 R SlavePump2 See menu 554 to 55C Relays 55D4 to 55DC Mode R SlavePump1 50 PC 7_1 Fig 41 Example of Fail safe operation 44 Main Features Omron SX inverter manual 7 6 6 PID control When using the Pump Control it is mandatory to acti vate the PID controller function Analogue inputs Anin1 to Anin4 can be set as functions for PID set values and or feedb
100. x600 340 580 4630 to 4800 K 1036 x1560 x450 2330 x2000 x600 496 860 Table 40 Mechanical specifications SX V 690V M odels Frame Dim H x W x D mm Dim H x W x D mm Weight IP20 Weight IP54 size IP20 A6xxx IP54 A6xxx kg kg 6090 to 6160 F69 1090 x345 x314 77 6200 to 6355 H69 1176 x500 x450 2330 x600 x600 176 311 6450 to 6500 169 1176 x730 x450 2330 x 1000 x600 257 449 6600 to 6630 J69 1176 x1100 x450 2330 x1200 x600 352 592 6710 to 61K0 K69 1176 x1560 x 450 2330 x 2000 x600 514 878 Omron SX inverter manual Technical Data 173 14 6 Environmental conditions Table 41 Operation Parameter Normal operation Nominal ambient temperature 0 C 40 C See table see Table 37 for different conditions Atmospheric pressure 86 106 kPa Relative humidity non condensing 0 90 Contamination according to IEC 60721 3 3 No electrically conductive dust allowed Cooling air must be clean and free from corro sive materials Chemical gases class 3C2 Solid particles class 352 According to IEC 600068 2 6 Sinusodial vibrations Vibrations e 10 lt f lt 57 Hz 0 075 mm 57 lt f lt 150 Hz 1g Altitude 0 1000 m with derating 1 100 m of rated current up to 2000 m Table 42 Storage Parameter Storage condition Temperature 20 to 60 C Atmospheric pressure 86 106 kPa Relative humidity non condensing 0 90 14 7 Fuses cable cross sections and glands
101. 090 EV to SX D4160 EV the cable interface plate can be removed Clamps for screening Cable interface Fig 17 Connecting motor and mains cables 1 Remove the cable interface plate from the VSD housing 2 Put the cables through the glands 3 Strip the cable according to Table 8 4 Connect the stripped cables to the respective mains motor terminal 5 Fix the clamps on appropriate place and tighten the cable in the clamp with good electrical contact to the cable screen Omron SX inverter manual Installation 19 6 Put the cable interface plate in place and secure with the fixing screws SX D4160 EV V to SX D4800 EV and SX D6200 EV 690V to SX D61K0 EV Fig 18 Connecting motor and mains cables VSD models SX D4160 EV to SX D4800 EV and SX D6200 EV to SX D61KO EV are supplied with Klock ner Moeller K3x240 4 power clamps For all type of wires to be connected the stripping length should be 32 mm 3 4 Cable specifications Table 7 Cable specifications Cable Cable specification j Power cable suitable for fixed installation forthe Mains voltage used Symmetrical three conductor cable with concen Motor tric protection PE wire or a four conductor c
102. 10 20 Bar 342 2 s inactive since 386 is activated and have higher priority 381 On 386 10 s 387 1 Bar The VSD will stop sleep when the speed PID output is below or equal to Min Speed for 10 seconds The VSD will activate wake up when the Process value goes below the PID Activation Margin which is related to the process reference i e goes below 20 1 Bar See Fig 67 711 Process Value 310 Process Ref 387 Activate Wake up 712 Speed 386 Stop Sleep 341 Min Speed Fig 67 PID Stop sleep with normal PID Example 2 PID control inverted tank level control 321 F Anin 322 m 310 7m 342 2 s inactive since 886 is activated and have higher priority 381 Inverted 386 30 s 387 1 m The VSD will stop sleep when the speed PID output is below or equal to Min Speed for 30 seconds The VSD will activate wake up when the Process value goes above the PID Activation Margin which is related to the process reference i e goes above 7 1 m See Fig 68 711 Process Value 387 Activate Wake up 310 Process Ref 712 Speed 386 Stop Sleep 341 Min Speed Fig 68 PID Stop sleep with inverted PID 100 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual PID Stea dy State Test 388 During the steady state test the PID operation is over
103. 100 elements exceeds maximum level NOTE Only valid if option board PTC PT100 is used Check cables and connection of the serial communication Check all settings with regard to the serial communication Restart the equipment including the VSD Check on mechanical overload on the motor or the machinery bearings gearboxes chains belts etc Check the motor cooling system Self cooled motor at low speed too high load Set PT100 to OFF Omron SX inverter manual Troubleshooting Diagnoses and Maintenance 159 Table 28 Trip condition their possible causes and remedial action Trip condition Possible Cause Remedy CRANE board detecting deviation in motor operation Check encoder signals Deviation Check Deviation jumper on Crane option board NOTE Only used in Crane Control EN Be que ie Ehe Check cables and wiring for Pump feedback signals Pump g 9 Check settings with regard to the pump feedback NOTE Only used in Pump Control digitalinputs e Lado Check the cooling of the VSD cabinet nn RA ofthe Check the functionality of the built in fans The fans VSD g p must switch on automatically if the heatsink tempera Over temp Insufficient cooling ture gets too high At power up the fans are briefly Too high current Paks on q Blocked or stuffed fans ED and molor rating Clean fans Motor current exceeds the peak VSD current Check the acceleration time settings and Too sho
104. 2 Fieldbus selected 4 byte process data same as Basic set eee e A NEE bet Extended 8 ting additional proprietary protocol for ee advanced users is Used the control board and fieldbus option is lost for time set in parameter 2642 2 If a serious network error has occurred Read Write 2633 Select read write to control the inverter over a fieldbus network For further information see the Fieldbus option manual Read Write St pry R Default RW RW 0 Read 1 Valid for process data Select R read only for logging proc ess without writing process data Select RW in normal cases to control inverter NOTE Menu 214 and or 215 must be set to COM to activate the communication fault function Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43037 Profibus dot index 168 196 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 8l Communication Fault Time 2642 Defines the delay time for the trip warning D om I me St pry 0 5s Default 0 55 Range 0 1 15 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43038 Profibus slot index 168 197 Fieldbus format Long 10 1 s Modbus format Elnt Ethernet 265 Settings for Ethernet module Modbus TCP For fur ther information see the Fieldbus option manual NOTE The Ethernet module must
105. 24000 Min Speed 4 x Motor Sync Speed Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43123 Profibus slot index 169 27 Fieldbus format Int 1 1 rpm Modbus format Ulnt 1 1 rpm NOTE It is not possible to set the maximum speed lower than the minimum speed Note Maximum Speed 343 has priority over Min Speed 341 i e if 343 is set below 341 then the drive will run at 343 Max Speed with acceleration times given by 335 and 336 respectively Skip Speed 1 Low 344 Within the Skip Speed range High to Low the speed cannot be constant in order to avoid mechanical reso nance in the VSD system When Skip Speed Low lt Ref Speed lt Skip Speed High then Output Speed Skip Speed HI during deceleration and Output Speed Skip Speed LO dur ing acceleration Fig 61 shows the function of skip speed hi and low Between Skip Speed HI and LO the speed changes with the set acceleration and deceleration times Skipspd1 LO sets the lower value for the 1st skip range i 2 Ip po o St pry Orpm Default 0 rpm Range 0 4 x Motor Sync Speed 94 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual Communication information Default 0 rpm Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43124 Range De Ax Motor syne Speen Profibus slot index 169 28 Communication information Fieldbus form
106. 2631 Enter the unit address of the VSD Additional Process Values 2634 Define the number of additional process values sent in cyclic messages 4 AddPr Values St pry 0 Default 0 Range 0 8 Communication Fault 264 Main menu for communication fault warning settings For further details please see the Fieldbus option man ual Communication Fault Mode 2641 Selects action if a communication fault is detected O Address Stpgy 62 04 om Mode St pry off Default 62 Range Profibus 0 126 DeviceNet 0 63 Default Off Node address valid for Profibus and DeviceNet Off 0 No communication supervision RS232 485 selected Process Data Mode 2632 The VSD will trip if there is no communica Enter the mode of process data cyclic data For fur SE ier e parameter 2642 ther information see the Fiel tion manual EE er information see the Fieldbus option manua Trip 1 The VSD will trip if 1 The internal communication between D Pr Data Mode the control board and fieldbus option is t Basi lost for time set in parameter 2642 S NA SE 2 If a serious network error has occurred Default Basic RS232 485 selected None 0 Control status information is not used The VSD will give evening if there is no communication for time set in parameter Basi 4 byte process data control status informa 2642 asic 4 SE 8 tion is used Warning
107. 3 comparators are all AND ed given the broken belt detection In menus 621 625 expression entered for Logic Y is visible Set menu 621 to CA1 Set menu 622 to amp Set menu 623 to A2 Set menu 624 to amp Set menu 625 to CD1 Menu 620 now holds the expression for Logic Y CA1 amp A28 amp CD1 which is to be read as CA1 amp A2 8 amp CD 1 NOTE Set menu 624 to to finish the expression when only two comparators are required for Logic Y Y Comp 1 621 Selects the first comparator for the logic Y function Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43411 Profibus slot index 170 60 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Y Operator 1 622 Selects the first operator for the logic Y function Y Operator Stpry amp Default amp amp 1 amp AND 2 0R 2 3 EXOR Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43412 Profibus dot index 170 61 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Y Comp 2 623 Selects the second comparator for the logic Y func o Y Comp tion St pry CA1 Default CA1 St OMR 142 cal 0 ER Wi 1 Default IA2 CA2 2 Selection Same as menu 621 da Communication information CDI 4 ID1 5 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43413 CD2 6 Profibus slot i
108. 3013 Profibus slot index 168 172 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt 60 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual Reference control 214 To control the speed of the motor the VSD needs a reference signal This reference signal can be con trolled by a remote source from the installation the keyboard of the VSD or by serial or fieldbus communi cation Select the required reference control for the application in this menu 4 Ref Contro St pry Remote Remote Default The reference signal comes from the ana Remote 0 logue inputs of the terminal strip terminals 1 22 Reference is set with the and keys on Keyboard 1 the Control Panel Can only be done in menu Set View reference 310 The reference is set via the serial commu Com 2 nication RS 485 Fieldbus See section section 10 5 for further information The reference is set via an option Only Option 3 available if the option can control the refer ence value NOTE If the reference is switched from Remote to Keyboard the last remote reference value will be the default value for the control panel Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43014 Profibus dot index 168 173 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Run Stop Control 215 This function is used to select the source for run and stop commands Start stop via analog
109. 320 380 342 354 Process inefficiency due to e g a blocked filter a damper not fully opened or a worn belt Load Curve Protection detects deviation Warning is sent or safety stop activated 411 419 41C1 41C9 Omron SX inverter manual Applications 33 6 1 3 Compressors Challenge OM RON SX V solution Menu High start currents require larger fuses and cables Cause stress on equipment and higher energy cost Torque control reduces start current Same fuses can be used as those required for the motor 331 336 351 Compressor is damaged when cooling media enters the compressor screw Overload situation is quickly detected and safety stop can be activated to avoid breakdown 411 41A Pressure is higher than needed causing leaks stress on the equipment and excessive air use Load Curve Protection function detects deviation Warning is sent or safety stop activated 411 419 41C1 41C9 Motor runs at same speed when no air is com pressed Energy is lost and equipment stressed PID continuously adapts to the level required Sleep function activated when none is needed 320 380 342 354 Process inefficiency and energy wasted due to e g the compressor idling Load Curve Protection quickly detects deviation Warning is sent or safety stop activated 411 419 41C1 41C9 6 1 4 Blowers Challenge OMRON SX V solution Menu High start currents req
110. 43174 Profibus slot index 169 78 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 Modbus format Elnt Example Max Speed 1500 rpm Min Speed 200 rom TransS Start 60 When an additional pump is needed the speed will be controlled down to min speed 60 x 1500 rom 200 rpm 200 rpm 780 rpm 980 rpm When this speed is reached the additional pump with the lowest run time hours will be switched on 106 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual Switch on Speed procedure starts Actual Additional pump Trans f Z f Master pump Min ooo po IAN E BESSERES w Pressur Actual start Flow Pressure command of next pump RELAY NG_50 PC 16_1 Fig 74 Transition speed start Transition Speed Stop 39G The transition speed stop is used to minimize a flow pressure overshoot when shutting down an additional pump The setting depends on the dynamics of both the master drive and the additional drives In general e f the additional pump has slow start stop dynam ics then a higher transition speed should be used e fthe additional pump has fast start stop dynam ics then a lower transition speed should be used rans op Stpry 60 Default 60 Range 0 100 of total min speed to max speed Flow Pressure Transition speed decreases overshoot Time Communication information Fig
111. 5 0 in V Hz mode Profibus slot index 170 150 170 158 Fieldbus format Int Modbus format Int NOTE When selections Anin1 Anin2 Anin4 is selected the setup of the AnOut menu 532 or 535 has to be set to 0 10V or 0 20mA When the AnOut Setup is set to e g 4 20mA the mirroring is not working correct 122 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual Communication information AnOut 1 Setup 532 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43251 Profibus slot index 169 155 Preset scaling and offset of the output configuration Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt An Ou etup St DD 4 20mA Default 4 20mA 4 20mA The current output has a fixed threshold Live Zero of 4 mA and controls the full range for the output signal See Fig 82 0 20mA m Normal full current scale configuration of the output that controls the full range for the output signal See Fig 81 User mA The scale of the current controlled output that controls the full range for the output signal Can be defined by the advanced AnOut Min and AnOut Max menus User Bipol mA 0 10V w Sets the output for a bipolar current out put where the scale controls the range for the output signal Scale can be defined in advanced menu AnOut Bipol Normal full voltage scale configuration of the output that control
112. 50 6500 J 4450 4500 3200 J69 6600 6630 Table5 Flow rates cooling fans Frame SX V Model Flow rate m hour K 4630 4800 K69 6710 61K0 4800 NOTE For the models 4450 4500 and 6800 61K0 the mentioned amount of air flow should be divided equally overthe two cabinets 2 3 2 Mounting schemes 2330 Ly Y Fig 10 SX V 400V Model 4160 to 4250 G and H SX V 690V Model 6200 to 6355 H69 14 Mounting Omron SX inverter manual CL IEE 2330 EE E 2330 Ze 1200 de 1000 Fig 11 SX V 400V Model 4315 to 4400 1 SX V 690V Model 6450 to 6500 169 Fig 12 SX V 400V Model 4450 to 4500 J SX V 690V Model 6600 to 6630 69 po P il ii L LL L PL EE E 2330 ES ES ES SS Y fro 2000 Fig 13 SX V 400V Model 4630 to 4800 K SX V 690V Model 6710 to 61K0 K69 Omron SX inverter manual Mounting 15 16 Mounting Omron SX inverter manual 3 Installation
113. 5196 AnIn3 FcMax Max Omron SX inverter manual Menu List 183 DEFAULT CUSTOM 5197 Anin3 ValMax 0 5198 Anin3 Oper Add 5199 Anin3 Filt 0 1s 5194 Anin3 Enabl On 51A Anin4 Fc Off 51B AnIn4 Setup 4 20mA 51c Anin4 Advan 51C1 Anin4 Min 4mA 5102 Anin4 Max 20 00mA 51c3 Anin4 Bipol 20 00mA 5104 Anin4 FcMin Min 5105 Anin4 ValMin 0 5106 AnIn4 FcMax Max 51C7 Anin4 ValMax 0 51C8 Anin4 Oper Add 51C9 Anin4 Filt 0 1s 51CA Anin4 Enabl On 520 Dig Inputs 521 Digin1 RunL 522 Digln 2 RunR 523 DigIn 3 Off 524 DigIn 4 Off 525 DigIn5 Off 526 DigIn 6 Off 527 DigIn 7 Off 528 DigIn 8 Reset 529 B oard l Digin 1 Off 524 B oard l DigIn 2 Off 528 B oard 1 Digin 3 Off 520 B oard 2 Digin 1 Off 52D B oard 2 DigIn 2 Off 52E B oard 2 Digin 3 Off 52F B oard 3 Digln 1 Off 52G B oard 3 Digln 2 Off 52H B oard 3 Digln 3 Off 530 An Outputs 531 AnOutl Fc Speed 532 AnOutl Setup 4 20mA 533 AnOutl Adv 5331 AnOut 1 Min 4mA 5332 AnOut 1 Max 20 0mA 5333 AnOut1Bipol 20 0mA 5334 AnOutl FcMin Min 5335 AnOutl VIMin 0 5336 AnOutl FcMax Max 5337 AnOutl VIMax 0 534 AnOut2 FC Torque DEFAULT CUSTOM
114. 56 Fieldbus format Long Modbus format Elnt Example A Key Rem TL This means A Parameter Set A is active Key Reference value comes from the keyboard CP Rem Run Stop commands come from terminals 1 22 TL Torque Limit active Warning 722 Display the actual or last warning condition A warning occurs if the VSD is close to a trip condition but still in operation During a warning condition the red trip LED will start to blink as long as the warning is active War ni ngs Stp warn msg The active warning message is displayed in menu 722 If no warning is active the message No Warning is displayed 142 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual The following warnings are possible Fieldbus integer Warning message value 0 No Error 1 Motor t 2 PTC 3 Motor lost 4 Locked rotor 5 Ext trip 6 Mon MaxAlarm 7 Mon MinAlarm 8 Comm error 9 PT100 11 Pump 12 Ext Mot Temp 13 LC Level 14 Brake 15 Option 16 Over temp 17 Over curr F 18 Over volt D 19 Over volt G 20 Over volt M 21 Over speed 22 Under voltage 23 Power fault 24 Desat 25 DClink error 26 Int error 27 Ovolt m cut 28 Over voltage 29 Not used 30 Not used 31 Not used Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31016 Profibus dot index 121 160 Fieldbus format Long Mo
115. 7 from 20 of synchronous speed At lower speed the over load current allowed will be smaller When the motor has an external cooling fan Forced is selected and the overload current allowed starts at 90 from rated motor current at zero speed up to nominal motor current at 70 of synchronous speed Fig 49 shows the characteristics with respect for Nominal Current and Speed in relation to the motor ventilation type selected Xlnom for 12t 100 4 Forced 0 90 0 87 Self one 0 20 0 70 2 00 xSync Speed Fig 49 Ft curves Motor Identification Run 229 This function is used when the VSD is put into opera tion for the first time To achieve an optimal control performance fine tuning of the motor parameters using a motor ID run is needed During the test run the display shows Test Run blinking To activate the Motor ID run select Short and press Enter Then press RunL or RunR on the control panel to start the ID run If menu 219 Rotation is set to L the RunR key is inactive and vice versa The ID run can be aborted by giving a Stop command via the control panel or Enable input The parameter will auto matically return to OFF when the test is completed The message Test Run OK is displayed Before the VSD can be operated normally again press the STOP RESET key on the control panel During the Short ID run the motor shaft does not rotate T
116. 8 Control signal inputs Analogue differential Analogue Voltage current Max input voltage Input impedance 0 10 V 0 20 mA via switch 30 V 30 mA 20 kQ voltage 250 Q current Resolution 11 bits sign Hardware accuracy 1 type 1 Y LSB fsd Non linearity 1 LSB Digital Input voltage Max input voltage Input impedance Signal delay High gt 9 VDC Low lt 4 VDC 30 VDC lt 3 3 VDC 4 7 KQ 23 3 VDC 3 6 kQ lt 8 ms Control signal outputs Analogue Output voltage current Max output voltage Short circuit current oo Output impedance 0 10 V 0 20 mA via software setting 15 V 5 mA cont 15 mA voltage 140 mA current 10 Q voltage Shortcircuit current oo Resolution 10 bit Maximum load impedance for current 500 Q Hardware accuracy 1 9 type fsd voltage 2 4 type fsd current Offset 3 LSB Non linearity 2 LSB Digital Output voltage High gt 20 VDC 50 mA gt 23 VDC open Low lt 1 VDC 50 mA 100 mA max together with 24 VDC Relays Contacts 0 1 2 A Umax 250 VAC or 42 VDC References 10VDC 10 Vpc 10 mA Short circuit current 30 mA max 10VDC 10 Vpc 10 mA 24VDC 24 Mee Short circuit current 100 mA max together with Digital Outputs Omron SX inverter manual Technical Data 171 14 3 Operation at higher temperatures OMRON variable speed drives are made for operation
117. 81 EE 81 EE 81 ED Re en E 82 EE ica ioe 82 E A E 82 A 82 A AE 82 A A ICE 82 I N aad emer 82 EE 83 EE 83 ENEE 84 EE 84 GD engel O 84 A EE 85 EE 85 EE 86 A ee 87 E era TIED TE Te 87 ee 88 EE 88 A E A 89 EA EE 89 EE 89 EE E 90 EE 90 OGY aka ce ead eet art 90 DI Der ee ee are Eee ene eee 91 EE 91 339 ERBE E Ee EE 91 IN EHE eege Be 92 GSB iss e E E I Te Naa ass Detaled la oh 92 DIO ar 92 BSD ele Ae ee eG Se 93 O sensi sec dad Eege eege 93 EE ER BBG eene ste ken 94 GED behest Ro 95 EE 95 G43 reece aii Sa Ee 96 lettre ae de E Geese senestnes ic 96 DOS eta as 96 EE 96 BAG his Ee SER Ee 97 BAS tatiana tien stees Beege Bed 97 Ehlen Dr tten DEE A EE 97 B54 EE 98 DOLO Ae 99 OL ee ates an beieis 99 B03 neger Leet elas 99 A shila EE 99 GOD ER oS a Se wh Dao eS 99 366 Austen 99 BOP negen Re AGE SAR En 100 O O 99 369 is II ra RO A 100 O Diada aa I 100 Di SS 100 Oi ET 101 OSO A 101 Olsen dra iaa 101 OSA En RRS 102 EE 102 B85 nits leaders tie E 102 380 eat EI NIE AN Seed 103 B87 ite teers tens eet Rae Bs RAS 103 E TEE 104 389 EE e D Ee 104 BOAT ETRA Seeerei erg 105 OIM AA aa Se 105 EE 105 BOA rics Ee atti A 106 OT aaia 107 396 Ras 107 EE 107 EE 108 DIA acia noto Bieten He 108 IB iS 108 BOG RO 109 II e T el 109 WIE enee eet acia 109 OI AO AS ASAS 110 E KE i n iia 110 CIR OM A Ah iit 111 DH tegt bieten Eiere fr een eg 114 411 sesh dita ea erie Sea Aa
118. 9 42 Fieldbus format Long Modbus format Elnt Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no Profibus slot index The same settings are valid for the menus 363 Preset Ref 2 with default 250 rom 364 Preset Ref 3 with default 500 rom 365 Preset Ref 4 with default 750 rom 366 Preset Ref 5 with default 1000 rom 367 Preset Ref 6 with default 1250 rom 368 Preset Ref 7 with default 1500 rom The selection of the presets is as in Table 21 Table 21 eat eee kel 0 0 0 Analogue reference 0 0 11 Preset Ref 1 0 12 0 Preset Ref2 0 1 1 Preset Ref 3 11 0 0 Preset Ref 4 1 0 1 Preset Ref 5 1 1 0 Preset Ref 6 1 1 1 Preset Ref 7 1 _ selected if only one preset reference is active 1 active input O non active input NOTE If only Preset Ctrl3 is active then the Preset Ref 4 can be selected If Presets Ctrl2 and 3 are active then the Preset Ref 2 4 and 6 can be selected Keyboard reference mode 369 This parameter sets how the reference value 810 is edited Mode Mot Pot 09 Key Re St pry Default MotPot The reference value is edited as a normal parameter the new reference value is activated when Enter is pressed after the value has been changed The Acc Time 331 and Dec Time 332 are used The reference value is edited using the motor potentiometer function the new reference value is activated directly when the key or is
119. Aninl Fc Process Ref 39 1 Rst Run Tm3 No 512 Anin1 Setup 4 20mA 39K Run Time 4 00 00 00 513 Aninl Advn 39K1 Rst Run Tm4 No 5131 Aninl Min 4mA 39L Run Time05 00 00 00 5132 Aninl Max 20 00mA 3911 Rst Run Tm5 No 5133 Aninl Bipol 20 00mA 39m Run Time 6 00 00 00 5134 Aninl FcMin Min 39M1 Rst Run Tm6 No 5135 Aninl ValMin 0 39N Pump 123456 5136 Aninl FcMax Max 400 Monitor Prot 5137 Aninl ValMax 0 410 Load Monitor 5138 Aninl Oper Add 411 Alarm Select Off 5139 Anin1 Filt 0 1s 412 Alarm trip Off 513A Anin1 Enabl On 413 Ramp Alarm Off 514 Anin2 Fc Off 414 Start Delay 25 515 Anin2 Setup 4 20mA 415 Load Type Basic 516 Anin2 Advan 416 Max Alarm 5161 AnIn2 Min 4mA 4161 MaxAlarmMar 15 5162 Anin2 Max 20 00mA 4162 MaxAlarmDel 10 15 5163 Anin2 Bipol 20 00mA 417 MaxPre alarm 5164 AnIn2 FcMin Min 4171 MaxPreAlMar 10 5165 AniIn2 ValMin 0 4172 MaxPreAlDel 0 1s 5166 Anin2 FcMax Max 418 Min Pre Alarm 5167 Anin2 ValMax 0 4181 MinPreAlMar 10 5168 Anin2 Oper Add 4182 MinPreAlDel 0 1s 5169 Anin2 Filt 0 1s 419 Min Alarm 516A AnIn2 Enabl On 4191 MinAlarmMar 15 517 Anin3 Fc Off 4192 MinAlarmDel 0 1s 518 Anin3 Setup 4 20mA 414 Autoset Alrm No 519 Anin3 Advan 418 Normal Load 100 5191 Anin3 Min 4mA AC Load Curve 5192 AnIn3 Max 20 00mA 41C1 Load Curve1 100 5193 Anin3 Bipol 20 00mA a c2 Load Curve2 100 5194 Anin3 FcMin Min 41c3 Load Curve3 100 5195 Anin3 ValMin 0 41C4 Load Curve A 100
120. Brake resistor coils option option ES L Metal connector housing Ly Motor Metal cable gland Mains Fig 20 Connection of mains and motor cables Omron SX inverter manual Getting Started 23 Table 11 Mains and motor connection L1 L2 L3 Mains supply 3 phase PE Safety earth al Motor earth UL VW Motor output 3 phase WARNING In order to work safely the mains earth must be connected to PE and the motor earthto _L 4 2 Using the function keys 100 200 300 E 210 gt 220 2116 221 AYJ Fig 21 Example of menu navigation when entering motor voltage Si step to lower menu level or confirm changed setting E step to higher menu level or ignore changed setting A step to next menu on the same level step to previous menu on the same level increase value or change selection decrease value or change selection 4 3 Remote control In this example external signals are used to control the VSD motor A standard 4 pole motor for 400 V an external start button and a reference value will also be used 4 3 1 Connect control cables Here you will make up the minimum wiring for starting In this example the motor VSD will run with right rota tion To comply with the EMC standard use screened co
121. Brake Engage Time 33E The brake engage time is the time the load is held to engage a mechanical brake Dr ngage Stpry 0 005 Default 0 005 Range 0 00 3 00 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43114 Profibus slot index 169 18 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 01 s Modbus format Elnt Wait Before Brake Time 33F The brake wait time is the time to keep brake open and to hold the load either in order to be able to speed up immediately or to stop and engage the brake Vector Brake 33G Braking by increasing the internal electrical losses in the motor Vector Brake St pry Off Default Off off 0 Vector brake switched off VSD brakes nor mal with voltage limit on the DC link Maximum VSD current Ic is available for On 1 4 braking Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43116 Profibus dot index 169 20 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Brake Fault trip time 33H Br au St pry 1 00s Default 1 00s Range 0 00 5 00s Note The Brake Fault trip time should be set to longer time than the Brake release time 33C Brk Wal St pry 0 00s Default 0 00s Range 0 00 30 0 5 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43115 Profibus slot index 169 19 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 01 s Modbus format El
122. Cat No 1127 EN 00B SX V High power Variable Frequency Inverters Model SX V 400 V Class Three Phase Input 90 kW to 800 kW 690 V Class Three Phase Input 90 kW to 1000 kW OMRON SX V INSTRUCTION MANUAL ENGLISH Software version 4 21 Document number 112 7 EN 00B Document name Omron SX inverter manual Edition Preliminary VO 97 Date of release 03 11 2009 Copyright Omron Electronics 2009 Omron retains the right to change specifications and illustrations in the text without prior notification The contents of this document may not be copied without the explicit permission of Omron Electronics Safety Instructions Precautions severity Follow this advice for good practice Not following can lead to malfunctioning or possibility of injury to the user High risk of malfunction or damage to the inverter or installation possibility of injury to the user Earth and grounding Potential risk of electric shock or damage to inverter or installation High inmediate risk of serious injury to the user inverter or installation Risk if manipulated by unqualified personnel O gt OFS WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS Instruction manual Read throuhfully this instruction manual before using the Variable Speed Drive VSD Mains voltage selection The variable speed drive may be ordered for use with the mains voltage range listed below SX V 4 230 480 V SX V 6 500 690 V IT Mains
123. Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43143 Profibus dot index 169 47 Fieldbus format Long Modbus format Elnt NOTE A too high level of IxR Compensation could cause motor saturation This can cause a Power Fault trip The effect of IxR Compensation is stronger with higher power motors NOTE The motor may be overheated at low speed Therefore it is important that the Motor I t Current 232 is set correctly Flux Optimization 354 Flux Optimization reduces the energy consumption and the motor noise at low or no load conditions Flux Optimization automatically decreases the V Hz ratio depending on the actual load of the motor when the process is in a steady situation Fig 64 shows the area within which the Flux Optimization is active A Flux optim St pry Of f Default Off Off 0 Function disabled On 1 Function enabled Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43144 Profibus slot index 169 48 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Fig 64 Flux Optimizing NOTE Flux optimization works best at stable situations in slow changing processes 11 3 7 Preset References 360 Motor Potentiometer 361 Sets the properties of the motor potentiometer func tion See the parameter DigIn1 521 for the selection of the motor potentiometer function ol Motor Po Stp
124. E Activated according to AND logic Stop 4 Enable command General start condition to run the VSD If made low during running the output of the VSD is cut off immedi ately causing the motor to coast to zero Enable 5 speed NOTE If none of the digital inputs are pro grammed to Enable the internal enable signal is active NOTE Activated according to AND logic Run Right command The output of the Rung d VSD will be a clockwise rotary field Run Left command The output of the VSD Run 7 F E will be a counter clockwise rotary field Reset 9 Reset command To reset a Trip condition and to enable the Autoreset function Preset Ctrl1 10 To select the Preset Reference Preset Ctrl2 11 To select the Preset Reference Preset Ctrl3 12 To select the Preset Reference Increases the internal reference value according to the set AccMotPot time 333 Has the same function as a real motor potentiometer see Fig 65 MotPot Up 13 Decreases the internal reference value 14 according to the set DecMotPot time 334 See MotPot Up MotPot Down Feedback input pump1 for Pump Fan con Eup 15 trol and informs about the status of the Feedb hr auxiliary connected pump fan Pump2 Feedback input pump 2 for Pump Fan con p 16 trol and informs about the status of the Feedb o auxiliary connected pump fan Pumps Feedbac
125. EE 114 Unlock Code EE 63 Upper Band 107 Menu 397 107 Upper Band Eimita nisansensaisnsaiskiassesaeen 108 V VAZ Modera Seed e TEE EO EEE 60 Vector Brake cccccssccsscsssesscescesscescessecssessecaecseecseeseeaes 94 Ventilation ere Eeer en n n i 66 View reference value c cscsccessesscessessecssessecsecssecseesseeaes 84 Voltage cional 28 W MET 152 194 Omron SX inverter manual
126. K1S K2M K2S K3M K3S N lt m NG_50 PC 11_3 Fig 44 Control connections for Alternating MASTER circuit with 3 pumps 46 Main Features Omron SX inverter manual 7 6 8 Checklist And Tips 1 Main Functions Start by choosing which of the two main functions to use Alternating MASTER function In this case the Master pump can be alternated although this function needs slightly more complicated wiring than the Fixed MASTER function described below The I O Board option is necessary Fixed MASTER function One pump is always the master only the additional pumps alternate Notice that there is a big difference in the wiring of the system between these main functions so it not possible to switch between these 2 functions later on For further information see section 7 6 2 page 46 2 Number of pumps drives If the system consists of 2 or 3 pumps the I O Board option is not needed However this does mean that the following functions are not then possible Alternating MASTER function With isolated inputs With the I O Board option installed the maximum number of pumps is 6 pumps if Alternating MASTER function is selected see section 7 6 3 on page 46 7 pumps if Fixed MASTER function is selected see section 7 6 2 page 46 3 Pump size Alternating MASTER function The sizes of the pumps must be equal Fixed MASTER function
127. Net no 43511 43519 Profibus slot index 170 160 170 168 128 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Relay Advanced 55D This function makes it possible to ensure that the relay will also be closed when the VSD is malfunctioning or powered down Example A process always requires a certain minimum flow To control the required number of pumps by the relay mode NC the e g the pumps can be controlled nor mally by the pump control but are also activated when the variable speed drive is tripped or powered down D Relay Adv St pry Relay 1 Mode 55D1 11 5 6 Virtual Connections 560 Functions to enable eight internal connections of com parator timer and digital signals without occupying physical digital in outputs Virtual connections are used to wireless connection of a digital output function to a digital input function Available signals and control functions can be used to create your own specific functions Example of start delay The motor will start in RunR 10 seconds after Digln1 gets high Digln1 has a time delay of 10 s Menu Parameter Setting 521 Digln1 Timer 1 561 VIO 1 Dest RunR 562 VIO 1 Source T1Q 641 Timer1 Trig Digln 1 642 Timerl Mode Delay 643 Timerl Delay 0 00 10 DI Relay Mode Stpyy N O Default N O The normal open contact of th
128. Sequence Sequence Default Fixed MASTER operation The additional drives will be selected in sequence i e first pump 1 then pump 2 etc A maximum of 7 drives can be used Sequence 0 102 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual Run Time Ep Fixed MASTER operation The additional drives will be selected depending on the Run Time So the drive with the lowest Run Time will be selected first The Run Time is monitored in menus 39H to 39M in sequence For each drive the Run Time can be reset When drives are stopped the drive with the longest Run Time will be stopped first Maximum 7 drives can be used All Alternating MASTER operation When the drive is powered up one drive is selected as the Master drive The selection criteria depends on the Change Condition 394 The drive will be selected according to the Run Time So the drive with the low est Run Time will be selected first The Run Time is monitored in menus 39H to 39M in sequence For each drive the Run Time can be reset A maximum of 6 drives can be used Timer Both The master drive will be changed if the timer setting in Change Timer 395 has elapsed The change will take place imme diately So during operation the additional pumps will be stopped temporarily the new master will be selected according to the Run Time and the additional pumps will be started again
129. Speed 300 rpm Lower Band 10 Stop delay will be activated Range Max Speed Min Speed 1500 300 1200 rpm 10 of 1200 rpm 120 rom Start level 300 120 420 rom Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43168 Profibus slot index 169 72 IP op Delay Fieldbus format Long 1 1 St PLY Os Modbus format Elnt Default Os Range 0 999 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43170 Profibus slot index 169 74 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 s Modbus format Elnt Speed OCH d BE Min i ES i BE EEN Le Flow Pressure Stop Delay 39A NG_50 PC 13_1 Upper Band Limit 39B If the speed of the pump reaches the upper band limit the next pump is started immediately without delay If a start delay is used this delay will be ignored Range is between 0 equalling max speed and the set per centage for the UpperBand 897 Fig 71 Lower band Start Delay 399 This delay time must have elapsed before the next pump is started A delay time prevents the nervous switching of pumps y E Upp St py Default 0 Band Lim 0 0 to Upper Band level Range that the Limit function 0 max speed means is switched off Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43171 Profibus dot index 169 75 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 Modbus format Elnt 99 art Delay
130. St phy 10 Default 10 Range 0 100 of total min speed to max speed Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43167 Profibus slot index 169 71 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 Modbus format Elnt Example Max Speed 1500 rpm Min Speed 300 rom Upper Band 10 Start delay will be activated Range Max Speed to Min Speed 1500 300 1200 rpm 10 of 1200 rom 120 rom Start level 1500 120 1380 rpm Speed next pump starts MaX eojonoooocannononananinanans 2 Geen en EN AAA TE ee Cee eee ii E ON p A yor Min ke Ken Flow Pressure Start Delay 399 NG_50 PC 12_1 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43166 Profibus slot index 169 70 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Fig 20 Upper band Lower Band 398 If the speed of the master drive comes into the lower band an additional drive will be stopped after a delay time This delay time is set in the parameter Stop Delay 39A IO ower Bang Step 10 Default 10 104 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual Range 0 100 of total min speed to max speed Communication information Stop Delay 39A This delay time must have elapsed before the top pump is stopped A delay time prevents the nervous switching of pumps Example Max Speed 1500 rpm Min
131. Tmp 868 PT100_1 2 3 86c FI Status 86D Digln status 86E DigOut status ser Anin12 86G Anin 3 4 86H AnOut1 2 861 10 Status Bl 86 lO Status B 2 86K 10 Status B3 86L Run Time 86cm Mains Time 86N Energy 870 871 Process Value 872 Speed 873 Torque 874 Shaft Power 875 Electrical Power 876 Current 877 Output voltage 878 Frequency 879 DC Link voltage 87A Heatsink Tmpe 878 PT100_1 2 3 87C FI Status 87D Digln status 87E DigOut status DEFAULT CUSTOM 87F Anin status 12 87G Anin status 3 4 87H AnOut status 1 2 871 lO Status Bl 87 lO Status B2 87K lO Status B3 87L Run Time 87m Mains Time 87N Energy 880 881 Process Value 882 Speed 818 Torque 884 Shaft Power 885 Electrical Power 886 Current 887 Output voltage 888 Frequency 889 DC Link voltage asa Heatsink Tmp 88B PT100_1 2 3 88c FI Status 88D DigIn status 88E DigOut status 88F Anin status 12 88G Anin status 3 4 88H AnOut status 1 2 881 lO Status Bl 88 IO Status B2 88K lO Status B3 88L Run Time sem Mains Time 88N Energy 890 891 Process Value 892 Speed 893 Torque 894 Shaft Power 895 Electrical Power 896 Current 897 Output voltage 898 Frequency 899 DC Link voltage 89A Heatsink Tmp 898 PT100_1 2 3 g9c FI Status 89D Digln status O
132. USTOM 83H AnOut status 1 2 831 lO Status Bl 83 IO Status B2 83K lO Status B3 83L Run Time 83M Mains Time 83N Energy 840 841 Process Value 842 Speed 843 Torque 844 Shaft Power 845 Electrical Power 846 Current 847 Output voltage 848 Frequency 849 DC Link voltage 84A Heatsink Tmp 848 PT100_1 2 3 84c Fl Status 84D Digln status 84E DigOut status 84F Anin status 1 2 84G Anin status 3 4 84H AnOut status 1 2 841 IO Status Bl 84 IO Status B2 84K IO Status B3 84L Run Time 84M Mains Time 84N Energy 850 851 Process Value 852 Speed 853 Torque 854 Shaft Power 855 Electrical Power 856 Current 857 Output voltage 858 Frequency 859 DC Link voltage 85A Heatsink Tmp 858 PT100_1 2 3 85C FI Status 85D Digln status 85E DigOut status 85F Anin1 2 186 Menu List Omron SX inverter manual DEFAULT CUSTOM 85G Anin 3 4 85H AnlOut1 2 851 10 Status Bl 85 IO Status B2 85K 10 Status B3 85L Run Time 85M Mains Time 85N Energy 860 861 Process Value 862 Speed 863 Torque 864 Shaft Power 865 Electrical Power 866 Current 867 Output voltage 868 Frequency 869 DC Link voltage 86A Heatsink
133. a voltage reference signal 516A Anin2 Enabl Digln set Anin2 to be active when Digln3 is LOW 523 DigIn3 Anln set DigIn3 as input fot selection of Al reference Subtracting analogue inputs Example 2 Subtract two signals Signal on Anln1 8 V Signal on AnIn2 4 V 511 Anin1 Function Process Ref 512 Anin1 Setup 0 10 V 5134 Anln1 Function Min Min 0 rpm 5136 Anln1 Function Max Max 1500 rpm 5138 Anin1 Operation Add 514 Anin2 Function Process Ref 515 Anin2 Setup 0 10 V 5164 Anin2 Function Min Min 0 rpm 5166 Anin2 Function Max Max 1500 rpm 5168 Anin2 Operation Sub Calculation Anin1 8 0 10 0 x 1500 0 O 1200 rpm Anin2 4 0 10 0 x 1500 0 O 600 rpm The actual process reference will be 1200 600 600 rpm Anin1 Setup 512 The analogue input setup is used to configure the ana logue input in accordance with the signal used that will be connected to the analogue input With this selec tion the input can be determined as current 4 20 mA or voltage 0 10 V controlled input Other selections are available for using a threshold live zero a bipolar input func tion or a user defined input range With a bipolar input reference signal it is possible to control the motor in two directions See Fig 80 NOTE The selection of voltage or current input is done with S1 When the switch is in voltage mode only the voltage menu i
134. able with compact low impedance concentric shield for the voltage used Control cable with low impedance shield Control screened 3 5 Stripping lengths Fig 19 indicates the recommended stripping lengths for motor and mains cables Table 8 _ Stripping lengths for mains and motor cables Mains cable Motor cable Model 3 b b R mm mm mm mm mm SX D4090 EV 160 16 160 16 41 SX D4110 EV to SX D4132 EV SX D6090 EV to 170 24 170 24 46 SX D6160 EV Mains Motor 06 F45 cables only Fig 19 Stripping lengths for cables 3 5 1 Dimension of cables and fuses Please refer to the chapter Technical data section 14 6 page 174 20 Installation Omron SX inverter manual 3 5 2 Tightening torque for mains and motor cables Table9 Model SX D4090 EV Menten _ Add the current for the motors in parallel Motor Current Menu 225 Set the average speed for the motors in Motor Speed parallel Menu 227 Set the average Cos PHI value for the Motor Cos PHI motors in parallel Brake chopper Mains motor Block mm 95 150 Cable diameter mm 16 95 35 95 120 150 Tightening torque Nm 14 14 24 Table 10 Model SX D4110 EV to SX D4132 EV and SX D6090 EV to SX D6160 EV Brake chopper Mains motor Block mm 150 240 Cable diameter mm 35 95 120 150
135. ack values Set Value Feedback See menu 381 to 385 553 to 55C 411 to 41C R SlavePump6 R SlavePump1 Value ow Pressure measurement NG_50 PC8_1 Fig 42 PID control Omron SX inverter manual Main Features 45 7 6 7 Wiring Alternating Master Fig 43 and Fig 44 show the relay functions MasterPump1 6 and SlavePump1 6 The Master and Additional contactors also interlock with each other to prevent dual powering of the pump and damage to the inverter K1M K1S K2M K2S K3M K8S Before running the SX V will select a pump to be Master depending on the pump run times CAUTION The wiring for the Alternating N Master control needs special attention and should be wired exactly as described here to avoid destructive short circuit at the output of the inverter PE 11 2 L3 77 US PEL11213 NG_50 PC 10_1 K3S K3M IE Fig 43 Power connections for Alternating MASTER circuit with 3 pumps Cari 7 Cari A Cairns f gen Pas TI Pus T I Master I Slave I 1 Master I Slave I 1 Master I Slave I l Pumpi I Pumpi I Pump2 I Pump2 I Pump3 I Pump3 I 1 ge Le IL Ll IL ll K1S K1M K2S K2M K3S K3M K1M
136. actual process information Process Source 321 Select the signal source for the process value that controls the motor The Process Source can be set to act as a function of the process signal on Anln F Anin a function of the motor speed F Speed a function of the shaft torque F Torque or as a function of a process value from serial communication F Bus The right function to select depends on the characteristics and behaviour of the process If the selection Speed Torque or Frequency is set the VSD will use speed torque or frequency as reference value Example An axial fan is speed controlled and there is no feed back signal available The process needs to be con trolled within fixed process values in n hr and a process read out of the air flow is needed The char acteristic of this fan is that the air flow is linearly related to the actual speed So by selecting F Speed as the Process Source the process can easily be controlled The selection F xx indicates that a process unit and scaling is needed set in menus 322 328 This makes it possible to e g use pressure sensors to measure flow etc If F AnIn is selected the source is automatically connected to the Anln which has Proc ess Value as selected Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 83 oc Source m h 9 Cubic meters per hour St DD Speed gal h 10 Gallons
137. ains voltage dip due to starting other of the VSD major power consuming machines on Try to use other mains supply lines if dip is caused by the same line other machinery Use the function low voltage override 421 Power Fault Overload condition in the DC link A e Check on bad motor cable connections Hard short circuit between phases or Check on bad h stl d hase to earth eck on bad earth cable connection l g a ES EEN Check on water or moisture in the motor housing and zircuitin cable connections Desat 9 Check that rating plate data of the motor is correctly Earth fault entered Desaturation of IGBTs e ET E Peak voltage on DC link ge trip Power Fault Error on power board Check mains supply voltage E Check for clogged air inlet filters in panel door and FaniError Error infan module blocking material in fan module HCB Error Error in controlled rectifier module HCB Check mains supply voltage 160 Troubleshooting Diagnoses and Maintenance Omron SX inverter manual Table 28 Trip condition their possible causes and remedial action Trip condition Possible Cause Remedy Desat Desat U Desat U S Check on bad motor cable connections Desat V Failure in output stage Check on bad earth cable connections Desat V desaturation of IGBTs Check on water and moisture in the motor housing and cable connections Desat W Desat W Desat BCC Make sure all three phases are properly
138. alarm list 9 In alarm list 1 process value has the DeviceNet instance number 31102 In alarm list 9 it has DeviceNet instance no 31502 see table 2 above The corresponding slot index no is then slot no abs 31502 1 255 123 index no modulo the remainder of the division above 136 calculated as 31502 1 123x255 136 11 8 3 Reset Trip Log 8A0 Resets the content of the 10 trip memories BAD Reset Trip Stp No Default No No 0 Yes 1 Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 147 Communication information Communication information Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 8 Profibus slot index 0 7 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt NOTE After the reset the setting goes automatically back to NO The message OK is displayed for 2 sec 11 9 System Data 900 Main menu for viewing all the VSD system data 11 9 1 VSD Data 920 VSD Type 921 Shows the VSD type according to the type number The options are indicated on the type plate of the VSD NOTE If the control board is not configured then type type shown is SX D6160 EV Q Y V Q Stp SX D6160 EV Example of type Communication information Examples Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31037 Profibus slot index 121 181 Fieldbus format Long Modbus format Text SX D6160 EVVSD series suited for 690 volt mains supply and
139. and is dependent on the selections made in Start Signal Level Edge 21A and the use of a separate Stop input via digital input Fig 104 Connection of safe stop option in size E and up Table 33 Specification of Safe Stop option board WARNING The safe stop function can never be used for electrical maintenance For electrical maintenance the VSD should always be disconnected from the supply voltage de Name Function Specification 1 Inhibit Inhibit driver circuits of DC 24 V 2 Inhibit power conductors 20 30 V 3 NO contact relay K2 Feedback confirmation 48 Vpc P contact Of activated inhibit 30 Vac 2 A 4 relayK2 5 GND Supply ground 6 424 VDC Supply Voltage for oper 24 Vpc ating Inhibit input only 50 mA 166 Options Omron SX inverter manual Safe Stop i x 7 WI l 1 K1 e lo E 5V Power board i u LA E bign Controller PWM Stop 30 DigOut Fig 105 13 9 Encoder Order number Description 01 3876 03 Encoder 2 0 option board The Encoder 2 0 option board used for connection of feedback signal of the actual motor speed via an incremental encoder is described in a
140. at Int Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43126 Modbus format Int Profibus slot index 169 30 Fieldbus format Int 1 1 rpm n Modbus format Int 1 1 rpm Skip Speed 2 High 347 The same function as menu 345 for the 2nd skip range Skip Speed HI Skip Speed LO I pspd Hi u St pry Orpm Default 0 rpm Range 0 4 x Motor Sync Speed Soe Reference Communication information NG_06 F17 Fig 61 Ship Speed Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43127 Profibus lot index 169 31 NOTE The two Skip Speed ranges may be overlapped Fieldbus format Int 1 1 rpm Modbus format Int 1 1 rpm Skip Speed 1 High 345 Skipspd1 HI sets the higher value for the 1st skip range d Ipspa d St pry Orpm Default 0 rpm Range 0 4 x Sync Speed Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43125 Profibus slot index 169 29 Fieldbus format Int Modbus format Int Skip Speed 2 Low 346 The same function as menu 344 for the 2nd skip range 16 SkipSpd 2 Lo Jog Speed 348 The Jog Speed function is activated by one of the dig ital inputs The digital input must be set to the Jog function 520 The Jog command function will auto matically generate a run command as long as the Jog command function is active The rotation is deter mined by the polarity of the set Jog Speed Example If Jog Speed 10 this will give a Run
141. at maximum of 40 C ambient temperature However for most models it is possible to use the VSD at higher temperatures with little loss in performance Table 37 shows ambient temperatures as well as der ating for higher temperatures Table 37 Ambient temperature and derating 400 690 V types SX D6090 EV to SX D6160 EV IP20 IP54 Model SX V Max temp Derating possible Max temp Derating possible SX D4090 EV to SX D4132 EV 40 C Yes 2 5 C to max 5 C SX 4160 EV to SX 4800 EV 40 C 2 5 C to max 5 C 40 C 2 5 C to max 5 C SX 6200 EV to SX 61K0 EV Example page 72 At switching frequencies gt 3 kHz derating In this example we have a motor with the following data that we want to run at the ambient temperature of 45 C might be needed Table 38 Switching frequency Voltage 400 V Current 165 A Power 90 kW Models Standard Switching Range frequency Select variable speed drive SX 4 xxx EV 3 kHz 1 5 6 kHz The ambient temperature is 5 C higher than the max SX 6 Xxx EV 3 kHz 1 5 6 kHz imum ambient temperature The following calculation is made to select the correct VSD model Derating is possible with loss in performance of 2 5 C Derating will be 5 X 2 5 12 5 Calculation for model SX D4090 EV 175 A 12 5 X 175 154A this is not enough Calculation for model SX D4110 EV 210 A 12 5 X 210 184A
142. ate On and Off times alternate mode In delay mode the output signal T1Q becomes high if the set delay time is expired See Fig 90 FE Timerl delay T1Q Fig 90 In alternate mode the output signal T1Q will switch automatically from high to low etc according to the set interval times See Fig 91 The output signal can be programmed to the digital or relay outputs used in logic functions 620 and 630 or as a virtual connection source 560 NOTE The actual timers are common for all parameter sets If the actual set is changed the timer functionality 641 to 645 will change according set settings but the timer value will stay unchanged So initialization of the timer might differ for a set change compared to normal triggering of a timer Timerl Trig o _ T1Q Fig 91 Timer 1 Trig 641 541 Timerl Trig Step Off Default Off Selection Same selections as Digital Output 1 menu 541 Communication information Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 43431 Profibus slot index 170 80 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 137 Timer 1 Mode 642 D4 imerl Mode Stop Of f Default Off Off 0 Delay 1 Alternate 2 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43432 Profibus slot index 170 81 Fieldbus format Ulnt
143. ault o leased jor Check circuit breaker feeding mechanical brake circuit Check mechanical brake if acknowledge signal is wired from brake limit switch Check brake contactor 2 6 Module number if parallel power units size 300 1500 A 12 3 Maintenance The variable speed drive is designed not to require any servicing or maintenance There are however some things which must be checked regularly All variable speed drives have built in fan which is speed controlled using heatsink temperature feed back This means that the fans are only running if the VSD is running and loaded The design of the heat sinks is such that the fan does not blow the cooling air through the interior of the VSD but only across the outer surface of the heatsink However running fans will always attract dust Depending on the environ ment the fan and the heatsink will collect dust Check this and clean the heatsink and the fans when neces sary If variable speed drives are built into cabinets also check and clean the dust filters of the cabinets regu larly Omron SX inverter manual Troubleshooting Diagnoses and Maintenance 161 Check external wiring connections and control sig nals Tighten terminal screws if necessary 162 Troubleshooting Diagnoses and Maintenance Omron SX inverter manual 13 Options The standard options available are described here briefly Some of the options have their own instruction or
144. be defined in advanced menu Anln Bipol N NOTE For bipol function input RunR and RunL needs to be active and Rotation 219 must be set to R NOTE Always check the needed set up when the setting of S1 is changed selection will not adapt automatically ROD a 0 10V 0 20 mA Ref o 10V 20mA NG_06 F21 Fig 81 Normal full scale configuration o 2V 10V 4mA 20mA Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43202 Profibus slot index 169 106 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Speed n gt NG_06 F21 Fig 80 Fig 82 2 10 V 4 20 mA Live Zero Anin1 Advanced 513 NOTE The different menus will automatically be set to either mA or V based on the selection in Anin 1 Setup 512 nf nl Advan St pry Anin1 Min 5131 Parameter to set the minimum value of the external reference signal Only visible if 512 User mA V Anini Min Stppy ONT 4 00mA Default 0 V 4 00 mA D 0 00 20 00 mA ge 0 10 00 V Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43203 Profibus slot index 169 107 Fieldbus format Long Modbus format Elnt 116 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual AnIn1 Max 5132 Parameter to set the maximum value of the external reference signal Only visi
145. be re booted to activate the below settings For example by toggling parameter 261 Non initialized settings indicated by flashing display text IP Address 2651 0 P Address 0 0 0 0 o o o o Default MAC Address 2652 0 MA Address Stppy900000000000 Default An unique number for the Ethernet module Subnet Mask 2653 0 0 0 0 o o o o Default 0 0 Gateway 2654 DHCP 2655 O DHCP St pry Off Default Off Selection On Off Fieldbus Signals 266 Defines modbus mapping for additional process val ues For further information see the Fieldbus option manual FB Signal 1 16 2661 266G Used to create a block of parameters which are read written via communication 1 to 8 read 1 to 8 write parameters possible 00 Db Signa St pry 0 Default 0 Range 0 65535 Communication information Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 42801 42816 Profibus dot index 167 215 167 230 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt FB Status 269 Sub menus showing status of fieldbus parameters Please see the Fieldbus manual for detailed informa tion 11 3 Process and Application Parameters 300 These parameters are mainly adjusted to obtain opti mum process or machine performance The read out references and actual values depends on selected process source 321
146. bel on the front of the unit position 1 2 No option A H Crane 1 0 Option board Encoder j PTC PT100 K Extended 0 Option board position 2 No option 1 Encoder J PTC PT100 K Extended UO Option board position 3 No option 1 Encoder J PTC PT100 K Extended UO Option board No option L DeviceNet 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SX D 6 160 E VF OPTIONS Fig 1 Type code number Position n chars Configuration 1 3 Inverter family name SX A 1P20 2 1 Protection class B IP00 D P54 4 400V 3 1 Voltage Class 6 690V 4 4 Power in kW Ee normal duty rating 1K0 1000kW 5 1 Market E Europe V V Hz 6 6 Control type F Direct Torque Control All options with sin 7 0 to 13 gle letter see table Hetters A to X below Fig 2 Option letters Cabinet input options Fieldbus M Profibus DP position 4 N RS232 485 O EtherNet Modbus TCP GE l No Liquid Cooling Liquid Cooling P Liquid Cooling EC Standard Q UL aur i e Marine No marine option R Marine option included 2 No cabinet input options S Main switch included T Main contactor included U Main switch contactor included Cabinet output optio
147. bit 1 DigOut2 bit 8 Relayl Modbus format bit 9 Relay2 bit 10 Relay3 Analogue Input Status 725 Indicates the status of the analogue inputs 1 and 2 An n Stp 100 65 Fig 95 Analogue input status Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31019 31020 Profibus slot index 121 163 121 164 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 Modbus format Elnt The first row indicates the analogue inputs 1Anln 1 2Anin 2 Reading downwards from the first row to the second row the status of the belonging input is shown in 100 AnIn1 has a negative 100 input value 65 AnIn2 has a 65 input value So the example in Fig 95 indicates that both the Ana logue inputs are active NOTE The shown percentages are absolute values based on the full range scale of the in our output so related to either 0 10 V or 0 20 mA Analogue Input Status 726 Indicates the status of the analogue inputs 3 and 4 e AN n 4 Stp 100 65 Fig 96 Analogue input status Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31021 31022 Profibus slot index 121 165 121 166 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 Modbus format Elnt Analogue Output Status 727 Indicates the status of the analogue outputs Fig 97 E g if 4 20 mA output is used the value 20 equals to 4 mA An Qu Stp 100 65 Fig 97 Analogue output status Communication
148. ble if 512 User mA V An n Via X Stp 10 0V 20 00mA Default 10 00 V 20 00 mA Raide 0 00 20 00 mA ge 0 10 00 V Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43205 Profibus slot index 169 109 Fieldbus format Long Modbus format Elnt Anin1 Function Min 5134 With Anin1 Function Min the physical minimum value is scaled to selected process unit The default scaling Communication information Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 43204 Profibus slot index 169 108 Fieldbus format Long Modbus format Elnt is dependent of the selected function of Anin1 511 Special function Inverted reference signal If the Anln minimum value is higher than the Anln max imum value the input will act as an inverted reference input see Fig 83 100 Invert Anin Min gt Anin Max o toy NG_06 F25 Fig 83 Inverted reference Anin1 Bipol 5133 This menu is automatically displayed if Anln1 Setup is set to User Bipol mA or User Bipol V The window will automatically show mA or V range according to selected function The range is set by changing the positive maximum value the negative value is auto matically adapted accordingly Only visible if 512 User Bipol mA V The inputs RunR and RunL input need to be active and Rotation 219 must be set to R L to operate the bipolar function on the analogue input
149. cation The VSD provides possibility for different types of serial communication e Modbus RTU via RS232 485 e Fieldbuses as Profibus DP and DeviceNet e Industrial Ethernet tyoe Modbus TCP 10 1 Modbus RTU The VSD has an asynchronous serial communication interface behind the control panel The protocol used for data exchange is based in the Modbus RTU proto col originally developed by Modicon the physical connection is RS232 The VSD acts as a slave with address 1 in a master slave configuration The com munication is half duplex It has a standard no return zero NRZ format The baud rate is fixed to 9600 The character frame format always 11 bits has e one start bit e eight data bits e two stop bits e no parity It is possible to temporarily connect a personal com puter with for example the software EmoSoftCom programming and monitoring software to the RS232 connector on the control panel This can be useful when copying parameters between variable speed drives etc For permanent connection of a personal computer you have to use one of the communication option boards Fig 46 Mounting frame for the control panel 10 2 Parameter sets Communication information for the different parameter sets The different parameter sets in the VSD have the fol lowing DeviceNet instance numbers and Profibus slot index numbers Parameter Modbus DeviceNet Profibus set Instance number S
150. ce 321 is set to Speed Example 1 Add signals with different weight fine tun ing Signal on Anin1 10 mA Signal on AnIn2 5 mA 511 Anin1 Function Process Ref 512 Anin1 Setup 4 20 mA 5134 Anini Function Min Min O rpm 5136 Anin1 Function Max Max 1500 rpm 5138 Anin1 Operation Add 514 Anln2 Function Process Ref 515 AnIn2 Setup 4 20 mA 5164 AnIn2 Function Min Min O rpm 5166 AnIn2 Function Max User defined 5167 Anln2 Value Max 300 rpm 5168 AnIn2 Operation Add Calculation Anin1 10 4 20 4 x 1500 0 O 562 5 rpm Anin2 5 4 20 4 x 300 0 O 18 75 rpm The actual process reference will be 562 5 18 75 581 rpm Analogue Input Selection via Digital Inputs When two different external Reference signals are used e g 4 20mA signal from control centre and a 0 10 V locally mounted potentiometer it is possible to switch between these two different analogue input sig nals via a Digital Input set to Anin Select Anin1 is 4 20 mA Antn2 is 0 10 V Digln3 is controlling the Anln selection HIGH is 4 20 mA LOW is 0 10 V 511 Anin1 Fc Process Ref set Anin1 as reference signal input 512 Anin1 Setup 4 20mA set Anin1 for a current reference signal 513A Anin1 Enable Digln set Anin1 to be active when Digln3 is HIGH 514 Anin2 Fc Process Ref set Amir as reference signal input 515 AnIn2 Setup 0 10V set Anin2 for
151. communication fieldbus 0 0 164 ORsoperator u a Ee EENS 140 Outputcolls Verid 164 Overload EE 40 114 Overload alarm ooooocconionninnocaninnonnoonocnnonnnonnonaronnronnraneoon 40 P Parameter sets Load default values c ccccccesscssecseessessecsecssecseesseeaes 73 Load parameter sets from Control Panel 74 Parameter Set Selection 35 Select a Parameter set ccccccsscessecesseesseeeeeecsseeeseens 72 IN BEE 100 PID Controller ccccccccccescesscessesscescesseceeesesessesseeseenee 101 Closed loop PID control esseere 102 Feedback signal siiis iiiseil 101 PID D ima 102 PID she Mime cota tada Ee Ee 102 PID DP Gam i222 2 28 RABE Haha 102 Power LED E 48 Priority nannten 37 Process Value ccccccsssssecsscsseesscessescescessecseeeesceseseeeseenee 146 Product standard EMC oooococcccconnnonnnonnnonnnnonnncnnnocnorannccnno 8 Programming Ee ENEE ee ier 51 Protection class IP23 and IP54 necces 163 PEO Inputs ern 71 PAE e 71 Pump Fan Control u tests 105 Q Quick Setup Card east 7 R Reference Frequency areas seele 118 Motor potentiometer ensaneenesnesnnnenenenneenenennennn 127 Reference sional u a essen 60 84 Set reference value a aeni 84 BR E 119 View reference value dE dee 84 Reference controll nes 61 Reference signal tik ass iii hs 61 Relay Gut put asus nison risent sonitu sE aeos 134 Relay Ti gereit e Ee EE en ees 134 Relay 2 veces sr asien 134 Relay E 134 Release s
152. compares the selectable ana logue value in menu 611 with the constant Level HI in menu 612 and constant Level LO in menu 613 When the value exceeds the upper limit level high the output signal CA1 becomes high and LAT low see Fig 86 When the value then decreases below the lower limit the output signal CA1 becomes low and A1 high The output signal can be programmed as a virtual connection source and to the digital or relay outputs Analogue value Menu 611 Signal CAl Adjustable Level HI Menu 612 o rap Adjustable Level LO Menu 613 NG_06 F125 Fig 86 Analogue Comparator Al Value St pry Speed 130 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual Default Speed Example Te Set by Unit 310 Create automatic RUN STOP signal via the analogue reference signal Analogue current reference signal 4 Speed 1 rpm 20 mA is connected to Analogue Input 1 Anin1 Torque 2 Setup menu 512 4 20 mA and the threshold is 4 mA Full scale 100 input signal on Anin 1 20 mA Shaft Power 3 kW When the reference signal on Anin1 increases 80 of El Power A kW the threshold 4 mA x 0 8 3 2 mA the VSD will be set in RUN mode When the signal on AnIn1 goes Current 5 JA below 60 of the threshold 4 mA x 0 6 2 4 mA the Output Volt 6 VSD i
153. condition Trip condition Stop 0 The Runtime of the master drive deter mines when a master drive has to be only take place Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 103 Change Timer 395 When the time set here is elapsed the master drive will be changed This function is only active if Select Drive 393 All and Change Cond 394 Timer Both Upper Band 397 If the speed of the master drive comes into the upper band an additional drive will be added after a delay time that is set in start delay 399 d ange I mer St py 50h Default 50h Range 1 3000h Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43165 Profibus slot index 169 69 Fieldbus format Ulnt 1 1 h Modbus format Ulnt 1 1 h Drives on Change 396 If a master drive is changed according to the timer function Change Condition Timer Both 394 it is possible to leave additional pumps running during the change operation With this function the change oper ation will be as smooth as possible The maximum number to be programmed in this menu depends on the number of additional drives Example If the number of drives is set to 6 the maximum value will be 4 This function is only active if Select Drive 893 All Jo Drives on St pry 0 Default 0 Range 0 to the number of drives 2 Communication information 57 Upper Banc
154. d MASTER ar 105 106 Fluxoptimization ar essen e 98 roueg a R 146 Fregu ney Priority iron iria 37 DA AAA E E 97 Maximum Frequency wosnaatiaora a 95 96 Minimum Frequency e occcconnoncnnoninanannnnnonanananannninnss 95 Preset Frequentes 99 Skip Frequency omnia 96 Frequency A EEEE EuS PEET ESS 37 Fuses cable cross sections and glands nene 174 G General electrical specifications neneenee 171 VO Board E 164 Dr protection Motor Dt Current ccoccononnncncninnnnnnncninannnnns 69 70 71 Motor BE Type nassen AE 69 UD Dette 40 66 Identification Run conooccnononinonnncnnnanoninanocanancnonaness 40 66 A na O ENOAT 174 Internal speed control ueneenenenesnenenenennenenennenn ne 100 Internal speed controller ueeneneenenesesnenenenennnnen nen 100 Speed Time een er 101 Speed P Galiana sera 100 A aan ee 82 83 IT Matis supply etica 1 IxR Compensation sen tirrr ie ar erine 98 J UTA SAA TA 97 K Keyboard references innen 100 Krilin id ista 48 Ri patio 50 PANSY papa E A fe Be BA Ase 50 Conttol keys nn aiken ain tra aren 48 ENTER iden escasa Risa 50 ESCAPE key 50 Function keys entierra sten 50 NEXT key aan ana dent 50 PREVIOUS key usina 50 RUN Lc steen RE 48 RUN R strenge geet 48 STOP RESET genee een 48 Topple Key saint sisi lides 48 L LED display E 47 Feel control ar 39 63 Load defatilt a ta 73 Load monitor eesessereseeesneensensnnennneense nennen nn 40 114 Toal Remote estate
155. d Max Pre Alarm menu 4171 41B Min Pre Alarm menu 41B 4181 Underload Min Alarm menu 41B 4191 These default set levels can be manually changed in menus 416 to 419 After execution the message Autoset OK is displayed for 1s and the selection reverts to No Normal Load 41B Set the level of the normal load The alarm or pre alarm will be activated when the load is above under normal load margin 41B Norma oad St pry 100 Default 100 Range 0 400 of max torque NOTE 100 Torque means Inom Imor The maximum depends on the motor current and VSD max current settings but the absolute maximum adjustment is 400 Communication information Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 43335 Profibus slot index 169 239 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 Modbus format Elnt Load Curve 41C The load curve function can be used with any smooth load curve The curve can be populated with a test run or the values can be entered or changed manually Load Curve 1 9 41C1 41C9 The measured load curve is based on 9 stored sam ples The curve starts at minimum speed and ends at maximum speed the range in between is divided into 8 equal steps The measured values of each sample are displayed in 41C1 to 41C9 and can be adapted manually The value of the 1st sampled value on the load curve is displayed oad Curve Stpp
156. d to both ends See Fig 26 NOTE Each installation must be examined carefully before applying the proper EMC measurements Control board Pressure sensor example External control e g in metal housing Fig 26 Electro Magnetic EM screening of control signal cables Omron SX inverter manual Control Connections 31 5 5 5 Current signals 0 4 20 mA A current signal like 0 4 20 mA is less sensitive to dis turbances than a 0 10 V signal because it is con nected to an input which has a lower impedance 250 Q than a voltage signal 20 KQ It is therefore strongly advised to use current control signals if the cables are longer than a few metres 5 5 6 Twisted cables Analogue and digital signals are less sensitive to inter ference if the cables carrying them are twisted This is certainly to be recommended if screening cannot be used By twisting the wires the exposed areas are minimised This means that in the current circuit for any possible High Frequency HF interference fields no voltage can be induced For a PLC it is therefore important that the return wire remains in proximity to the signal wire It is important that the pair of wires is fully twisted over 360 5 6 Connecting options The option cards are connected by the optional con nectors X4 or X5 on the control board see Fig 23 page 27 and mounted above the control board The
157. d 1 1 rpm Torque 1 1 Process val 1 0 001 Fieldbus format Modbus format Elnt AnOutl Function Max 5336 With AnOut1 Function Min the physical minimum value is scaled to selected presentation The default scaling Fieldbus format Speed 1 1 rpm Torque 1 1 Process val 1 0 001 Modbus format Elnt AnOut2 Function 534 Sets the function for the Analogue Output 2 4 AnQu c St pry Torque Default Torque Selection Same as in menu 531 Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 125 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43261 Profibus slot index 169 165 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt 11 5 4 Digital Outputs 540 Submenu with all the settings for the digital outputs Digital Out 1 541 Sets the function for the digital output 1 AnOut2 Setup 535 Preset scaling and offset of the output configuration for analogue output 2 NOTE The definitions described here are valid for the active output condition An Qu etup St ply 4 20mA Default 4 20mA Selection Same as in menu 532 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43262 Profibus dot index 169 166 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt AnOut2 Advanced 536 Same functions and submenus as under AnOut1 41 Di gOut St pry Ready Default Read
158. d Cooling Level is active low Brake acknowledge input for Brake Fault Brk Ackn 31 control Function is activated via this selection NOTE For bipol function input RunR and RunL needs to be active and Rotation 219 must be set to RH Communication information Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 43241 Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 121 Profibus slot index 169 145 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Table 23 Parameter Set Set Ctrl 1 Set Ctrl 2 oj ofo gt ojejo lr O CH NOTE To activate the parameter set selection menu 241 must be set to DigIn Digital Input 2 522 to Digital Input 8 528 Same function as DigIn 1 521 Default function for DigIn 8 is Reset For Digln 3 to 7 the default function is 11 5 3 Analogue Outputs 530 Submenu with all settings for the analogue outputs Selections can be made from application and VSD val ues in order to visualize actual status Analogue out puts can also be used as a mirror of the analogue input Such a signal can be used as e a reference signal for the next VSD in a Master Slave configuration See Fig 85 e a feedback acknowledgement of the received ana logue reference value AnOutl Function 531 Sets the function for the Analogue Output 1 Scale and range are defined by AnOut1 Advanced settings 533 Off
159. d in menu 5136 AnInl VaMax Stop 0 000 Default 0 000 Range 10000 000 10000 000 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43551 Profibus slot index 170 200 Long Speed 1 1 rpm Torque 1 1 Process val 1 0 001 Fieldbus format Modbus format Elnt Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43208 Profibus slot index 169 112 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Anin1 Filter 5139 If the input signal is unstable e g fluctuation reference value the filter can be used to stabilize the signal A change of the input signal will reach 63 on Anin1 within the set Anin1 Filter time After 5 times the set time Anin1 will have reached 100 of the input change See Fig 84 d Anin l St pry 0 1s Default 0 1s Range 0 001 10 0s 118 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual Communication information Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43209 Profibus slot index 169 113 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 001 s Modbus format Elnt Anin change Original input signal 100 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43211 Profibus slot index 169 115 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Anin2 Setup 515 Parameter for setting the function of Analogue Input 2 Same functions as AnIn1 Setup 512 Filtered Anin signal 63
160. dbus format Ulnt See also the Chapter 12 page 157 Digital Input Status 723 Indicates the status of the digital inouts See Fig 93 1Digln 1 2DigIn 2 3Digln 3 ADigIn 4 5Digln 5 6Digln 6 7DigIn 7 8DigIn 8 The positions one to eight read from left to right indi cate the status of the associated input 1High OLow The example in Fig 93 indicates that Digln 1 DigIn 3 and Digln 6 are active at this moment DigIn Status Stp 1010 0100 Fig 93 Digital input status example Communication information Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 31017 Profibus slot index 121 161 Fieldbus format Ulnt bit O Digln1 bit 8 DigIn8 Modbus format Digital Output Status 724 Indicates the status of the digital outputs and relays See Fig 94 RE indicate the status of the relays on position 1Relay1 2Relay2 3Relay3 DO indicate the status of the digital outputs on posi tion 1DigOut1 2DigOut2 The status of the associated output is shown 1High OLow Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 143 The example in Fig 94 indicates that DigOut1 is active and Digital Out 2 is not active Relay 1 is active relay 2 and 3 are not active A Di gOutStatus Stp RE 100 DO 10 Fig 94 Digital output status example Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31018 Profibus slot index 121 162 Fieldbus format Ulnt bit O DigOutl
161. e Default 0 Range 32768 to 32767 100 to 100 ref Corresponding to Communication information Modbus DeviceNet Instance number Profibus slot Index 168 65 42906 Fieldbus format Int Modbus format Int Example See Fielbus option manual for detalied information We would like to control the inverter over a bus system using the first two bytes of the Basic Control Message by setting menu 2661 FB Signal 1 to 49972 Further we also want to transmit a 16 bit signed reference and process value This is done by setting menu 2662 FB Signal 2 to 42905 and menu 2663 FB Signal 3 to 42906 NOTE It is possible to view the transmitted process value in control panel menu Operation 710 The presented value is depending on settings in menus Process Min 324 and Process Max 325 The reference value is set in modbus number 42905 0 4000 h corresponds to 0 100 of actual reference value 10 6 Description of the Elnt formats Modbus parameters can have different formats e g a standard unsigned signed integer or eint Elnt which is described below All parameters written to a register may be rounded to the number of significant digits used in the internal system 54 Serial communication Omron SX inverter manual If a parameter is in Eint format the 16 bit number should be interpreted like this F EEEE MMMMMMMMMMM F Format bit O Unsinged integer mode 1 Ei
162. e resistor Brake level Voc DC brake voltage level see Table 29 Rmin minimum allowable brake resistor see Table 30 and Table 31 ED effective braking period Defined as Active brake time at nominal braking ED power s Maximum value of 120 s 1 continuous braking Table 29 Brake Voltage levels en no Brake level Vpc 220 240 380 380 415 660 440 480 TT 500 525 360 550 600 TT 660 690 EE Omron SX inverter manual Options 163 Table 30 Brake resistor SX V 400V type NOTE Although the VSD will detect a failure in the brake electronics the use of resistors with a thermal overload which will cut off the power at overload is strongly recommended The brake chopper option is built in by the manufac turer and must be specified when the VSD is ordered 13 4 1 0 Board Order number Description 01 3876 01 I O option board 2 0 The I O option board 2 0 provides three extra relay outputs and three extra digital inputs The I O Board works in combination with the Pump Fan Control but can also be used as a separate option This option is described in a separate manual 13 5 Output coils Output coils which are supplied separately are rec ommended for lengths of screened motor cable longer than 100 m Because of the fast switching of the motor voltage and the capacitance of the motor cabl
163. e 0 m 58 NOTE If F Bus is chosen in menu 321 see section 0 9 1 10 n 59 10 5 1 Process value A 11 A 60 12 1 Communication information e 6 C 13 62 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43302 D 14 63 Profibus slot index 169 206 E 15 p 64 Fieldbus format Ulnt F 16 q 65 Modbus format Ulnt G 17 7 66 f H 18 S 67 Process Unit 322 T f es J 20 u 69 TOR ER K 21 i 70 St pry rpm L 22 v 71 Default rpm M 23 w 72 off 0 No unit selection N 24 X 73 1 Percent C 2 Degrees Centigrade 0 25 y Gs F 3 Degrees Fahrenheit P 26 Z 75 bar A bar Q 27 a 76 Pa 5 Pascal R 28 a 77 Nm 6 Torque S 29 78 Hz 7 Frequency T 30 I 79 rpm 8 Revolutions per minute U 31 80 84 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual Communication information Character No for serial Character No for serial comm comm 43304 U 32 81 43305 43306 V ER 82 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43307 W 34 83 43308 X 35 amp 84 43309 169 208 Y ap 169 209 37 86 Profibus slot index en A 38 87 169 212 39 88 169 213 40 89 Fieldbus format Ulnt a 41 f 90 Modbus format Ulnt 42 91 When sending a unit name you send one character at b 43 i 92 a time starting at the right most position 44 93 d 45 94 Process Min 324 e 46 95 T
164. e both line to line and line to earth screen large switching currents can be generated with long lengths of motor cable Output coils prevent the VSD from trip ping and should be installed as closely as possible to the VSD 13 6 Serial communication and fieldbus Order number Description 01 3876 04 RS232 485 01 3876 05 Profibus DP 01 3876 06 DeviceNet 01 3876 09 Modbus TCP Ethernet Type Rmin ohm if supply Rmin ohm if supply 380 415 Vac 440 480 Vac SX D4090 EV 3 8 4 4 SX D4110 EV 2 7 31 SX D4132 EV 2 7 31 SX 4160 EV 2x3 8 2x4 4 SX 4200 EV 2x3 8 2x4 4 SX 4220 EV 2x2 1 EEN SX 4250 EV 2x2 1 EEN SX 4315 EV 3x2 7 3x31 SX 4355 EV 3x2 7 3x31 SX 4400 EV 3x2 7 3 x3 1 SX 4450 EV 4x27 4x31 SX 4500 EV 4x2 7 4x31 SX 4630 EV 6x2 7 6 x3 1 SX 4800 EV 6x2 7 6 x3 1 Table 31 Brake resistors SX V 690V types Rmin ohm Rmin ohm Rmin ohm Type if supply if supply if supply 500 525 Vac 550 600 Vac 660 690 Vac SX D6090 EV 4 9 5 7 6 5 SX D6110EV 4 9 5 7 6 5 SX D6132 EV 4 9 5 7 6 5 SX D6160 EV 4 9 5 7 6 5 SX 6200 EV 2x49 2x5 7 2x6 5 SX 6250 EV 2x49 2x5 7 2x6 5 SX 6315 EV 2x4 9 2x5 7 2x6 5 SX 6355 EV 2x49 2x5 7 2x6 5 SX 6450 EV 3 x4 9 3x5 7 3x6 5 SX 6500 EV 3x49 3x5 7 3x6 5 SX 6600 EV 4x49 4x57 4x65 SX 6630 EV 4x49 4x57 4x65 SX 6710 EV 6 x4 9 6x5 7 6x6 5 SX 6800 EV 6 x4 9 6x5 7 6x6 5 SX 6900 EV 6 x4 9 6x5 7 6x6 5 SX 61K0 EV 6 x4 9 6 x5 7 6 x6 5
165. e character list Confirm the character by moving the cursor to the next position by pressing the Next key See section User defined Unit 323 Example Create user name USER 15 1 When in the menu 923 press Next to move the cursor to the right most position 2 Press the key until the character U is displayed 3 Press Next 4 Then press the key until S is displayed and con firm with Next 5 Repeat until you have entered USER15 Default No characters shown Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 42301 42312 Profibus slot index 165 225 236 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt When sending a unit name you send one character at a time starting at the right most position Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 149 150 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 151 152 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 153 154 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 155 156 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual 12 Troubleshooting Diagnoses and Maintenance 12 1 Trips warnings and limits In order to protect the variable speed drive the princi pal operating variables are continuously monitored by the system If one of these variables exceeds
166. e defined Local operation mode i e 2171 and 2172 The actual status of the VSD will not change e g Run Stop conditions and the actual speed will remain exactly the same When the VSD is set to Local operation the display will show J in area B in the dis play Omron SX inverter manual Operation via the Control Panel 49 The VSD will be started and stopped using the keys on the control panel The reference signal can be con trolled using the and keys on the keyboard when in the menu 310 according to the selection in Key board Reference menu 369 Remote mode When the VSD is switched to REMOTE operation the VSD will be controlled according to selected control methods in the menu s Reference Control 214 Run Stop Control 215 and Reset Control 216 The actual operation status of the VSD will reflect the status and settings of the programmed control selections e g Start Stop status and settings of the programmed control selections acceleration or deceleration speed according to the selected reference value in the menu Acceleration Time 331 Deceleration Time 832 To monitor the actual Local or Remote status of the VSD control a Loc Rem function is available on the Digital Outputs or Relays When the VSD is set to Local the signal on the DigOut or Relay will be active high in Remote the signal will be inactive low See menu Digital Outputs 540 and Relays 550 9 2 6 Functio
167. e function is active om Error Stop Off Default Off Off 0 Off 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43089 Profibus slot index 168 248 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 s Modbus format Elnt Communication Error Trip Type 25 Select the preferred way to react to a communication X rip St pry Off Default Off Off 0 Off 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s Communication information trip St pry om Error Trip Default Trip Selection Same as menu 25B Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43080 Profibus slot index 168 239 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 s Modbus format Elnt External Trip Type 25H Select the preferred way to react to an alarm trip Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43090 Profibus dot index 168 249 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt St pry X rip Trip Default Trip Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 77 Min Alarm 25K Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone When the time delay has elapsed the alarm will be reset if the function is active Profibus slot index 168 252 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 s Modbus format Elnt Max Alarm Trip Type 25N Select the preferred way to react to a max alarm trip
168. e g a blocked pipe a valve not fully opened or a worn impeller Pump Curve Protection detects deviation Warn ing is sent or safety stop activated 411 419 41C1 41C9 Water hammer damages the pump when stopped Smooth linear stops protect the equipment Elimi high energy consumption and equipment wear Motor runs at same speed despite varying demands in pressure flow Energy is lost and equipment stressed speed gives more exact control PID continuously adapts to the level required Sleep function is activated when none is needed Mechanical stress on pipes valves gaskets seals nates need for costly motorized valves 3312236 6 1 2 Fans Challenge OMRON SX V solution Menu High start currents require larger fuses and cables Torque control reduces start current Same fuses i 331 336 351 Cause stress on equipment and higher energy cost can be used as those required for the motor Starting a fan rotating in the wrong direction can be Fan is started at low speed to ensure correct e SC j 219 341 critical e g a tunnel fan in event of a fire direction and proper function Draft causes turned off fan to rotate the wrong way l Starting causes high current peaks and mechanical Motor e gradually slowed to complete stop before 219 33A 335 tres starting Avoids blown fuses and breakdown Regulating pressure flow with dampers causes Automatic regulation of pressure flow with motor 321 354
169. e ideas are given here Multi frequency selection Within a single parameter set the 7 preset references can be selected via the digital inputs In combination with the parameter sets 28 preset references can be selected using all 4 digital inputs Digln1 2 and 3 for selecting preset reference within one parameter set and DigIn 4 and Digln 5 for selecting the parameter sets Bottling machine with 3 different products Use 3 parameter sets for 3 different Jog reference speeds when the machine needs to be set up The 4th parameter set can be used for normal remote con trol when the machine is running at full production Manual automatic control If in an application something is filled up manually and then the level is automatically controlled using PID reg ulation this is solved using one parameter set for the manual control and one for the automatic control 7 1 1 One motor and one parameter set This is the most common application for pumps and fans Once default motor M1 and parameter set A have been selected 1 Enter the settings for motor data 2 Enter the settings for other parameters e g inputs and outputs 7 1 2 One motor and two parameter sets This application is useful if you for example have a machine running at two different speeds for different products Once default motor M1 is selected 1 Select parameter set A in menu 241 2 Enter motor data in menu 220
170. e reference signal passes the Level HI value from 7 above negative edge the comparator CAl does not change output stays high The reference signal passes the Level LO value from 8 above negative edge the comparator CA1 is reset output is set low Analogue Comparator 1 Level Low 613 Selects the analogue comparator constant low level according to the selected value in menu 611 For default value see selection table for menu 612 0 e eve U St ply 200rpm Default 200 rpm Range Enter a value for the low level Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43403 Profibus slot index 170 52 Long 1 1 W 0 1 A 0 1 V 0 1 Hz 0 1 C 1 kWh 1H 1 1 rpm or 0 001 via process value Fieldbus format Modbus format Elnt Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43404 Profibus slot index 170 53 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Analogue Comparator 2 Level High 615 Function is identical to analogue comparator 1 level high 0 L evel P St pEy 20 Default 20 Range Enter a value for the high level Communication information Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 43405 Profibus slot index 170 54 Long 1 1 W 0 1 A 0 1 V 0 1 Hz 0 1 C 1 kWh 1H 1 1 rpm or 0 001 via process value Fieldbus format Modbus format Elnt
171. e relay will S 0 be activated when the function is active The normally closed contact of the relay will act as a normal open contact The N C 1 contact will be opened when function is not active and closed when function is active Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43276 Profibus slot index 169 180 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Relay Modes 55D2 to 55DC Same function as for relay 1 mode 55D1 Communication information NOTE When a digital input and a virtual destination are set to the same function this function will act as an OR logic function Virtual Connection 1 Destination 561 With this function the destination of the virtual connec tion is established When a function can be controlled by several sources e g VC destination or Digital Input the function will be controlled in conformity with OR logic See DigIn for descriptions of the different selec tions O VIO Des Stop off Default Off Same selections as for Digital Input 1 Selection menu 521 Communication information 43277 43278 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43521 43529 169 181 169 182 Profibus slot index 170 170 170 178 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43281 Profibus slot index 169 185 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus forma
172. e time it takes for the motor to decelerate from nominal motor speed to O rom Acc MotPo Stpry 16 05 Default 16 0 s Range 0 50 3600 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43103 Profibus slot index 169 7 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 01 s Modbus format Elnt Deceleration Time Motor Potentiometer 334 If the MotPot function is selected this is the decelera tion time for the MotPot down command The deceler vec ation time is defined as the time it takes for the motor St ply 10 0s potentiometer value to decrease from nominal speed to O rpm Default 10 05 Range 0 50 3600 s 4 Dec MotPo St pry 16 0s Communication information Default 16 05 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43102 Range 0 50 3600 s Profibus slot index 169 6 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 01 s Communication information Madbustormat Ein Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43104 Profibus lot index 169 8 NOTE If the Dec Time is too short and the generator energy cannot be dissipated in a brake resistor the Fieldbus format Long 1 0 01 motor is decelerated according to the overvoltage limit Modbus format Elnt The actual deceleration time may be longer than the value set Acceleration Time Motor Potentiometer 333 It is possible to control the speed of the VSD using the motor potentiometer function This function controls
173. e user value in menu 5337 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43256 Profibus slot index 169 160 Long Fieldbus format 1 0 1 W 0 1 Hz 0 1 A 0 1 Vor 0 001 Modbus format Elnt Example Set the AnOut function for Motorfrequency to OHz set AnOut functionMin 5334 to User defined and AnOut1 VaMin 5335 0 0 This results in an anlogue output signal from 0 4 mA to 20MA Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43257 Profibus slot index 169 161 Fieldbus format Long 0 001 Modbus format Elnt NOTE It is possible to set AnOut1 up as an inverted output signal by setting AnOut1 Min gt AnOutl Max See Fig 83 AnOutl Function Value Max 5337 With AnOut1 Function VaMax you define a user defined value for the signal Only visible when user defined is selected in menu 5334 F AnOut LVaMax AnOutl Function Value Min 5335 St 0 000 With AnOut1 Function VaMin you define a user NA defined value for the signal Only visible when user Default 0 000 defined is selected in menu 5334 Range 10000 000 10000 000 ERR Communication information St pry 0 000 Default 0 000 Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 43555 Range 10000 000 10000 000 Profibus slot index 170 204 Long Communication information Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 43545 Profibus slot index 170 194 Long Spee
174. ecccecesseesseesesseessessessesseseeeseeses 3 39 74 158 Aut t ne ee ee Ee 100 B Bad EE 51 81 82 Brake chopper nur nen ina 163 Brake function e tr tt A 92 93 Bak release EE 92 Brake oral teneseveuslesasstep ist 93 Brake Engage Time cojan ande 93 Brake Wait time nooo ico 93 Releasespeed rn orina 93 Vector Brake cti hijos 94 Brake functions Pre UE tinta int ist 119 Brake resistors ui ld 163 C Cable cross section cccescssessesseeseseesessecseeseneeeseesenesaes 174 Cable specifications miii ease 20 GE marki g senil raro pa 9 Change Condition mn 106 Change Tio 106 107 Clockwise rotary field eeeneeeeeseennnenennenn 126 COM Parators es tepals a eege ite 136 Connecting control signals cneeenesneeneneneneenenenenennen 30 Connections Brake chopper Connections unennenneeennenesneeenen 17 Control signal connections nenenneeeeenenenenen 30 Mains supply atocha nates ern esse eats 17 24 Motor earth 17 24 Motor output seiis erneieren a 17 24 Safety eath E 17 24 Control panel s et eiss stzetsbte ticos 47 Control Panel memory cecrnocmencnonieninateni 40 Copy all settings to Control Panel wee 74 E VE 119 Control signal connections 0 sees eeseseeeteeseseneeeeeees 30 Control signals sarah da 28 30 Edge controlled 2 4 ee risas 39 63 Level controlled cocooconnonocinnonccinnnninnnnacinnnnonos 39 63 Counter clockwise rotary field ccseseseseeseseeseteerenee 126 G treht bn 28 Cu
175. een VSD and control panel 7 5 Load Monitor and Process Protection 400 7 5 1 Load Monitor 410 The monitor functions enable the VSD to be used asa load monitor Load monitors are used to protect machines and processes against mechanical overload and underload such as a conveyer belt or screw con veyer jamming belt failure on a fan or a pump dry run ning The load is measured in the VSD by the calculated motor shaft torque There is an overload alarm Max Alarm and Max Pre Alarm and an under load alarm Min Alarm and Min Pre Alarm The Basic Monitor type uses fixed levels for overload and underload pre alarms over the whole speed range This function can be used in constant load applications where the torque is not dependent on the speed e g conveyor belt displacement pump screw pump etc For applications with a torque that is dependent on the speed the Load Curve monitor type is preferred By measuring the actual load curve of the process char acteristically over the range of minimum speed to maximum speed an accurate protection at any speed can be established The max and min alarm can be set for a trip condition The pre alarms act as a warning condition All the alarms can be monitored on the digital or relay out puts The autoset function automatically sets the 4 alarm levels whilst running maximum alarm maximum pre alarm minimum alarm and minimum pre alarm Fig 34 gives an example of the monito
176. el has been Alarm 18 reached The max or min pre alarm level has Pre Alarm 19 been reached 126 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual The max alarm level has been PTC Trip 59 Trip when function is active Max Alarm 20 reached PT100 Trip 60 Trip when function is active Max PreAlarm 21 nn EE level has been Overvolt 61 Overvoltage due to high main voltage f Overvolt G 62 Overvoltage due to generation mode Min Alarm 22 The min alarm level has been i reached Overvolt D 63 Overvoltage due to deceleration Min PreAlarm 23 Denn pre alarm Level has been Acc 64 Acceleration along the acc ramp i Dec 65 Deceleration along the dec ramp bal e EE 12t 66 It limit protection active e Logic output Y inverted V Limit 67 Overvoltage limit function active Logic output Z C Limit 68 Overcurrent limit function active e 2 Ee Overtemp 69 Over temperature warning CA1 28 Analogue comparator 1 output Low voltage 70 Low voltage waming IAl 29 Analogue comp 1 inverted output Digin 1 71 Digital input 1 CA2 30 Analogue comparator 2 output Digin 2 72 Digital input 2 IA2 EN Analogue comp 2 inverted output Digin 3 73 Digital input 3 CD 1 32 Digital comparator 1 output Digi
177. elect Keyboard using the key A and press a to confirm 8 Press E to get to previous menu level and then y to display menu 220 Motor Data 4 4 3 Set the Motor Data Enter correct motor data for the connected motor 9 Press 2 to display menu 221 4 0 Change the value using the A and Y keys Con firm with J 1 Press A to display menu 222 4 4 2 Repeat step 9 and 10 until all motor data is entered 13 Press Esc twice and then to display menu 100 Preferred View 4 4 4 Entera Reference Value Enter a reference value 14 Press 3 until menu 300 Process is displayed 15 Press to display menu 310 Set View refer ence value 16 Use the A and Y keys to enter for example 300 rpm We select a low value to check the rota tion direction without damaging the application 4 4 5 Run the VSD Press the Big key on the control panel to run the motor forward If the motor is running the main connections are OK Omron SX inverter manual Getting Started 25 26 Getting Started Omron SX inverter manual 5 Control Connections 5 1 Control board Fig 23 shows the layout of the control board which is where the parts most important to the user are located Although the control board is galvanically iso lated from the mains for safety reasons do not make changes while the mains supply is on WARNING Always switch off the mains voltage and wait at least 5 minutes to a
178. els 114 EE 114 Omron SX inverter manual 191 GIS seiten 114 Mic E 115 EE 115 EE 115 O 115 MID ni 115 4172 RT 116 418 RIA 116 MIN iii is 116 4182 id 116 MIN ta o 116 AION ainia 116 A s ON 117 MAA li 117 EENEG 117 O EE 117 Blei 118 422 ran era Reine 119 EE 119 AL EE 119 EE 119 S12 url 121 HE 122 SA ccd aS nA Nee 124 E 125 lO iin Sea haa 125 S17 ae di a dation eege 125 5 18 radia tawian aii klein 125 NA edu 125 SLA rises Rite aged ai 125 GIB aie cas agate ans penne 126 O EE 126 A EEE EEE TE get tention aia 94 126 O 127 529 932 nein 127 E EE 128 e EE 129 IN E R E ER 130 EE 131 535 Scat eee Rel RAN a ie E 132 TO 132 Sa ain ene nee dere 132 542 a it arenes 134 S51 cialis 134 E EE 134 EE 134 KREE 135 BE rs 135 TR 136 563 56G sc eas iene hina 136 UL 136 GEL sais ahead aisle 136 OUD ageet lge 138 e E 139 O14 o envied 139 e 139 OIG arten een 139 Citas 140 O geet 140 EE 140 A as cease aerate meas mittens 140 141 EE 141 EEN 141 er este 141 EE 141 Eege 142 oa EE 142 Ee 142 A EEN 142 EE 143 EE Resa ich ca er see 143 TEE 143 E ee ea 143 A 144 A N E 144 Ga ea ee ter 144 Ee 144 TEE 145 EE 145 Ee 145 EE 145 O A ON 145 EE E 145 MER 146 EE eege 146 FN EE 146 EEN 146 EE 147 Ee 147 Eet 147 CARS A E ne ENE e 147 Bee 147 AE Ee 147 TEE 148 Ae MAA ae ge Ral E 148 EEN 148 EEN 148 E EE 148 TEENE ENEE AEE IAR 148 EE 149 002 See 149
179. en the VSD is in a 33 N O1 TRIP condition 28 Control Connections Omron SX inverter manual 5 4 Connection example Fig 24 gives an overall view of a VSD connection example ne Alternative for potentiometer control 1 Niola A oO N Default setting 1 0 10V 2 4 20 mA 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 omRon 19 Digin 7 SX INVERTER REV STOP FWD RUN RESET RUN LOCIREM ESC Optional 10 VDC Anin 1 Reference Anin 2 Anin 3 Common 12 Anin 4 AnOut 1 13 10 VDC AnOut 2 114 Common DigOut 1 20 DigIn 1 RunL DigOut 2 94 DigIn 2 RunR DigIn3 31 FESTEN Common Digln 4 DigIn 5 Digln 6 a igIn j Relay2 N42 43 DigIn 8 Reset Relay 3 Fieldbus option orPC The switch S1 is set to U Option board NG_06 F27 Fig 24 Connection example Omron SX inverter manual Control Connections 29 5 5 Connecting the Control Signals 5 5 1 Cables The standard control signal connections are suitable for stranded flexible wire up to 1 5 mm and for solid wire up to 2 5 mm
180. en using a minimum speed a much smoother and better control range of the whole system will be achieved Omron SX inverter manual Main Features 47 7 6 9 Functional Examples of Start pump directly on line Of course other start stop Stop Transitions equipment like a soft starter could be controlled by the relay output Starting an additional pump This figure shows a possible sequence with all levels and functions involved when a additional pump is started by means of the pump control relays The starting of the second pump is controlled by one of the relay outputs The relay in this example starts the Flow wee Set view ref 310 Feedback Flow time Master pump Speed Maxspeed 343 Transition Speed Start LA do oa 39E Min speed __twerband i _ __ 341 i i i I L gt l I D i j Start delay 399 Settle time start 39D tme 2nd pump Speed Start ramp depends on start method I Start command time Fig 45 Time sequence starting an additional pump 48 Main Features Omron SX inverter manual Stopping an additional pump This figure shows a possible sequence with all levels and functions involved when an additional pump is stopped by means of the pump control relays The stopping of the second pump is controlled by one of the relay outputs The relay in this example stops the pump directly on line Of course other start stop equipm
181. ent like a soft starter could be controlled by the relay output Set view ref 310 Feedback Flow eee time Master pump Speed Max speed 343 Transition Speed Stop L 39G Min speed 341 Stop delay 39A Settle time stop 39F time 2nd pump Speed Stop ramp depends on start method Stop command time NG_50 PC 20_1 Fig 46 Time sequence stopping an additional pump Omron SX inverter manual Main Features 49 8 EMC and Machine Directive 8 1 EMC standards The variable speed drive complies with the following standards EN IEC 61800 3 2004 Adjustable speed electronic power drive systems part 3 EMC product standards Standard category C3 for systems of rated supply voltage lt 1000 VAC intended for use in the second environment Optional Category C2 for systems of rated supply voltage lt 1 000 V which is neither a plug in device nor a movable device and when used in the first environ ment is intended to be installed and commissioned only by experienced person with the necessary skills in installing and or commissioning variable speed drives including their EMC aspects 8 2 Stop categories and emergency stop The following information is important if emergency stop circuits are used or needed in the installation where a variable speed drive is used EN 60204 1 defines 3 stop categories Catego
182. ented by the Elnt floating point format is m 108 To convert a value from the Elnt floating point format to a floating point value use the formula above To convert a floating point value to the Elnt floating point format see the code float_to_eint below Example The number 1 23 would be represented by this in Elnt F EEEE MMMMMMMMMM 1 1110 00001111011 F 1 gt Eint E 2 123 The value is then 123x10 1 23 Omron SX inverter manual Serial communication 55 Programming example typedef struct int m 11 mantissa 1024 1023 int e 4 exponent 8 7 unsigned int f 1 format 1 gt special emoint format eint16 unsigned short int float_to_eintl6 float value eint16 etmp int dec 0 while floor value value amp amp dec lt 16 dect value 10 if value gt 0 amp amp value lt 32767 amp amp dec 0 short int amp etmp short int value else if value gt 1000 amp amp value lt 0 amp amp dec 0 0 1 short int value etmp e etmp f etmp m else etmp m 0 etmp f 1 etmp e dec if value gt 0 etmp m 1 Set sign else etmp m 1 Set sign value fabs value while value gt 1000 etmp e increase exponent value value 10 value 0 5 round etmp m etmp m value make signed return unsigned short int amp etmp float eint16_to_float unsigned short int value
183. er to optimize the stop and prevent unnecessary wear like water ham mer Stop Mode sets the way of stopping the motor when a Stop command is given 5 Stop Mode St pry Decel Default Decel The motor decelerates to 0 rpm according Decel 0 SE to the set deceleration time Coast 1 The motor freewheels naturally to 0 rpm Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43111 Profibus dot index 169 15 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt 90 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual 11 3 4 Mechanical brake control Communication information The four brake related menus 33C to 33F can be used to control mechanical brakes Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43112 Profibus slot index 169 16 Brake Release Time 33C Fieldbus format Long 1 0 01 s The Brake Release Time sets the time the VSD delays Modbus format Elnt before ramping up to whatever final reference value is selected During this time a predefined speed can be Fig h the relati t the Brake func generated to hold the load where after the mechanical Ig 28 SFO We Me Salen Berea ie PS no ti brake finally releases This speed can be selected at me Release Speed 33D Immediate after the brake e Brake Release Time 33C release time expiration the brake lift signal is set The e Start Speed 33D user can set a digital output or relay to the function Brake
184. er2 50 Activate pump master 2 engaged during stop PumpMaster3 51 Activate pump master 3 rec Communication information PumpMaster4 52 Activate pump master 4 PumpMaster5 53 Activate pump master 5 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43271 PumpMaster6 54 Activate pump master 6 Profibus lot index 169 175 All Pumps 55 All pumps are running Fieldbus format Ulnt Only Master 56 Only the master is running Modbus format Ulnt Loc Rem 57 Local Rem function is active Standby 58 Standby supply option is active Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 127 Digital Out 2 542 Relay 2 552 NOTE The definitions described here are valid for the active output condition NOTE The definitions described here are valid for the active output condition Sets the function for the digital output 2 Sets the function for the relay output 2 A DI gUu Relay Stpry No Trip St pry Run Default No trip Default Run Selection Same as in menu 541 Selection Same as in menu 541 Communication information Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43272 Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 43274 Profibus slot index 169 176 Profibus dot index 169 178 Fieldbus format Ulnt Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt 11 5 5 Relays 550 Submenu with all the settings for the relay outputs T
185. es given in this and the following para graphs follow the input selection shown in Fig 30 38 Main Features Omron SX inverter manual gt x lt 12 1 13 2 14 3 15 4 16 5 Stop I 17 6 18 Y 19 RunL ii 8 RunR 9 29 21 Enable Reset 10 22 24 V 11 Fig 30 Example of wiring for Run Stop Enable Reset inputs The Enable input must be continuously active in order to accept any run right or run left command If both RunR and RunL inputs are active then the VSD stops according to the selected Stop Mode Fig 31 gives an example of a possible sequence INPUTS ENABLE STOP RUN R RUN L OUTPUT STATUS Right rotation Left rotation Standstill 06 F103new_1 Fig 31 Input and output status for level control Run Inputs Edge controlled Menu 21A Start signal Level Edge must be set to Edge to activate edge control This means that an input is activated by a low to high transition or vice versa NOTE Edge controlled inputs comply with the Machine Directive see chapter EMC and Machine Directive if the inputs are directly used for starting and stopping the machine See Fig 30 The Enable and Stop input must be active continuously in order to accept any run right or run left command The last edge RunR or Run is valid Fig 32 gives an example of a possible sequence INPUTS ENABLE STOP es
186. etc e Know how the VSD will be lifted and transported 2 1 Lifting instructions Note To prevent personal risks and any damage to the unit during lifting it is advised that the lifting methods described below are used Models 4090 to 4132 and 6090 to 6250 Load 56 to 74 kg Fig 3 Lifting model 4090 4132 and 6090 6250 Omron SX inverter manual Mounting 11 Models 4160 to 4800 and 6315 to 61K0 Fig 4 Remove the roof plate Terminals for roof fan unit supply cables DETAIL A Fig 5 Remove roof unit Fig 6 Lifting VSD model 4160 4800 and 6315 61K0 2 2 Stand alone units The VSD must be mounted in a vertical position against a flat surface Use the template delivered together with the VSD to mark out the position of the fixing holes 12 Mounting Omron SX inverter manual Fig 7 Mounting models 4090 4800 and 6090 61K0 2 2 1 Cooling Fig 7 shows the minimum free space required around the VSD for the models 4090 4800 and 6090 61KO0 in order to guarantee adequate cooling Because the fans blow the air from the bottom to the top it is advis able not to position an air inlet immediately above an air outlet The following minimum separation between two varia ble speed drives or a VSD and
187. f motors Contact your supplier for details 1 1 Delivery and unpacking Check for any visible signs of damage Inform your supplier immediately of any damage found Do not install the variable speed drive if damage is found The variable speed drives are delivered with a template for positioning the fixing holes on a flat surface Check that all items are present and that the type number is correct 1 2 Using of the instruction manual Within this instruction manual the abbreviation VSD is used to indicate the complete variable speed drive as a single unit Check that the software version number on the first page of this manual matches the software version in the variable speed drive With help of the index and the contents it is easy to track individual functions and to find out how to use and set them The Quick Setup Card can be put in a cabinet door so that it is always easy to access in case of an emer gency Omron SX inverter manual Introduction 1 3 Ordering codes Fig 1 and Fig 2 give examples of the ordering code numbering used on SX variable speed drives With this code number the exact type of the drive can be deter mined This identification will be required for type spe Options Letter means no character 2 No coating Coated boards G Coated boards cific information when mounting and installing The code number is located on the product la
188. ferent sets M1 to M4 can be revert to default setting in menu 243 Default gt Set WARNING Enter the correct motor data to prevent dangerous situations and assure correct control Motor Voltage 221 Set the nominal motor voltage 400 V for SX V A Default 690 V for SXV 6 Motor Volts 8 Stppym 400V Range 100 700 V Resolution 1V NOTE The Motor Volts value will always be stored as a 3 digit value with a resolution of 1 V Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43041 Profibus slot index 168 200 Long Fieldbus format 1 01V Modbus format Elnt Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43042 Profibus dot index 168 201 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 Hz Modbus format Elnt Motor Power 223 Set the nominal motor power If parallel motors set the value as sum of motors power Motor Power amp StppyMl Pnom k Default PuomVSD Range 1W 120 x Pyom Resolution 3 significant digits NOTE The Motor Power value will always be stored as a 3 digit value in W upto 999 W and in kW for all higher powers Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43043 Profibus slot index 168 202 Long Fieldbus format 1 1 W Modbus format Elnt Pnom Is the nominal VSD power Motor Current 224 Set the nominal motor current H parallel motors set the sum of the motor c
189. g is dependent of the selected function of Anin1 511 See Table 22 o Anini FcMax St pry Max Default Max Min 0 Min value Max 1 Max value User defined 2 Define user value in menu 5137 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43207 Profibus slot index 169 111 Long Fieldbus format Speed Torque 1 1 rpm or Other 1 0 001 NOTE With Anin Min Anin Max Anin Function Min and Anin Function Max settings loss of feedback signals e g voltage drop due to long sensor wiring can be compensated to ensure an accurate process control Example Process sensor is a sensor with the following specifi cation Range 0 3 bar Output 2 10 mA Analogue input should be set up according to 512 Anin1 Setup User mA 5131 Anin1 Min 2 mA 5132 Anini Max 10 mA 5134 Anin1 Function Min User defined 5135 Anin1 VaMin 0 000 bar 5136 Anin 1 Function Max User defined 5137 Anin1 VaMax 3 000 bar Anin1 Operation 5138 6 Aninl Oper St pry Add Default Add Add 0 Analogue signal is added to selected func tion in menu 511 Sub 1 Analogue signal is subtracted from selected function in menu 511 Communication information Modbus format Elnt Anin1 Function Value Max 5137 With AnIn1 Function VaMax you define a user defined value for the signal Only visible when user defined is selecte
190. he M anufacturer s Declaration ANNEX IIB the installation instructions detailed in this instruction manual must be followed to the letter A category C3 Table 1 Standards Market Standard Description Machine Directive 98 37 EEC EMC Directive 2004 108 EEC European Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC WEEE Directive 2002 96 EC Safety of machinery Electrical equipment of machines EN 60204 1 Part l General requirements 3 Machine Directive Manufacturer s certificate acc to Appendix IIB Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC requirements and specific test methods EN IEC 61800 3 2004 VS EMC Directive Declaration of Conformity and CE marking All Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 5 1 EN IEC 61800 5 1 Ed Safety requirements Electrical thermal and energy 2 0 Low Voltage Directive Declaration of Conformity and CE marking Classification of environmental conditions Air quality chemical vapours unit in operation Chemical gases 3C1 Solid particles 352 ees Optional with coated boards Unit in operation Chemical gases Class 3C2 Solid particles 352 UL508C UL Safety standard for Power Conversion Equipment UL Safety standard for Power Conversion Equipment power conversion equip USA gt 90 Aonly ment UL and UL UL 840 Insulation coordination including clearances and creepage distances for electri cal equipment Russian GOST R For all sizes Omro
191. he VSD measures the rotor and stator resist ance 9 Motor D Run 8 stppymi Off Default Off see Note Off 0 Not active Parameters are measured with injected DC short current No rotation of the shaft will occur Ep Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43049 Profibus slot index 168 208 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt NOTE To run the VSD it is not mandatory for the ID RUN to be executed but without it the performance will not be optimal NOTE If the ID Run is aborted or not completed the message Interrupted will be displayed The previous data do not need to be changed in this case Check that the motor data are correct Motor Sound 22A Sets the sound characteristic of the VSD output stage by changing the switching frequency and or pattern Generally the motor noise will go down at higher switching frequencies A Motor Sound 8 StppyM1 F Default F E 0 Switching frequency 1 5 kHz F 1 Switching frequency 3 kHz G 2 Switching frequency 6 kHz H 3 Switching frequency 6 kHz random fre quency 750 Hz Advanced 4 Switching frequency and PWM mode setup via 22E Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43050 Profibus slot index 168 209 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt 66 Functional Description Omron SX inverter man
192. he input must be high NOTE Stop Mode Coast 33B will give the same behaviour as the Enable input STOP STOP DECEL OUTPUT SPEED ENABLE OUTPUT SPEED 06 F104_NG or if Spinstart is selected Fig 29 Functionality of the Stop and Enable input Reset and Autoreset operation If the VSD is in Stop Mode due to a trip condition the VSD can be remotely reset by a pulse low to high transition on the Reset input default on Digln 8 Depending on the selected control method a restart takes place as follows Level control If the Run inputs remain in their position the VSD will start immediately after the Reset command is given Edge control After the Reset command is given a new Run com mand must be applied to start the VSD again Autoreset is enabled if the Reset input is continuously active The Autoreset functions are programmed in menu Autoreset 250 NOTE If the control commands are programmed for Keyboard control or Com Autoreset is not possible Run Inputs Level controlled The inputs are set as default for level control This means that an input is activated by making the input continuously High This method is commonly used if for example PLCs are used to operate the VSD comply with the Machine Directive if the inputs CAUTION Level controlled inputs DO NOT are directly used to start and stop the machine The exampl
193. he relay mode selection makes it possible to estab lish a fail safe relay operation by using the normal closed contact to function as the normal open con tact Relay 3 553 Sets the function for the relay output 3 NOTE Additional relays will become available when I O option boards are connected Maximum 3 boards with 3 relays each Relay 1 551 Sets the function for the relay output 1 Same function as digital output 1 541 can be selected nel ay St pry off Default Off Selection Same as in menu 541 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43275 Profibus slot index 169 179 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt nel ay Stpyy Trip Default Trip Selection Same as in menu 541 Communication information Board Relay 554 to 55C These additional relays are only visible if an I O option board is fitted in slot 1 2 or 3 The outputs are named B1 Relay 1 3 B2 Relay 1 3 and B3 Relay 1 3 B stands for board and 1 3 is the number of the board which is related to the position of the I O option board Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43273 Profibus slot index 169 177 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt on the option mounting plate NOTE Visible only if optional board is detected or if any input output is activated Communication information Modbus Instance no Device
194. he time delay has elapsed the alarm will be reset if the function is active Over temperature 252 4 Overvo Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone St PLY Of f When the time delay has elapsed the alarm will be reset if the function is active Default Si Off 0 Off Ov ertemp 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s St pry Of f Communication information Default Off Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43076 74 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual Profibus slot index 168 235 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 s Modbus format Elnt Overvolt 255 Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone When the time delay has elapsed the alarm will be reset if the function is active Uvervo St pry Of f Default Off Off 0 Off 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43077 Profibus slot index 168 236 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 s Modbus format Elnt Motor Lost 256 Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone When the time delay has elapsed the alarm will be reset if the function is active o Motor os St pry Of f Default Off Off 0 Off 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s NOTE Only visible when Motor Lost is selected Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43083 Prof
195. his function sets the minimum process value allowed 47 lt 96 b V E 48 97 Se rocess a 49 gt 98 PLY f 50 99 Default 0 0 000 10000 Speed Torque F Speed g a 100 Range F Torque h 52 101 10000 10000 F Anin PT100 F Bus i 53 B 102 Communication information 54 E 103 j 55 2 104 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43310 k 56 3 105 Profibus slot index 169 214 57 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 001 Modbus format Elnt Example Create a user unit named kPa 1 When in the menu 323 press Next to move the cursor to the right most position 2 Press the key until the character k is displayed 3 Press Next 4 Then press the key until P is displayed and con firm with Next 5 Repeat until you have entered kPa User Uni St pry Default No characters shown Process Max 325 This menu is not visible when speed torque or fre quency is selected The function sets the value of the maximum process value allowed Process Max St ply 0 Default 0 Range 0 000 10000 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43311 Profibus slot index 169 215 Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 85 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 001 Modbus format Elnt Ratio 326 This menu is not visible when speed frequency or torque is selected The function sets the ratio between the actual process value and the mo
196. ibus slot index 168 242 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 s Modbus format Elnt Locked Rotor 257 Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone When the time delay has elapsed the alarm will be reset if the function is active ocked Rotor St pry Of f Default Off Off 0 Off 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43086 Profibus slot index 168 245 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 s Modbus format Elnt Power Fault 258 Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone When the time delay has elapsed the alarm will be reset if the function is active D Power au St pry Of f Default Off Off 0 Off 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s Communication information Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 43087 Profibus slot index 168 246 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 s Modbus format Elnt Undervoltage 259 Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone When the time delay has elapsed the alarm will be reset if the function is active 5 Undervoltage St pry off Default Off Off 0 Off 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 75 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43088 Profibus slot index 168 247 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 s Modbus format Elnt Motor Hr 25A
197. ieldbus format Long 1 0 01 Modbus format Elnt Motor ventilation 228 Parameter for setting the type of motor ventilation Affects the characteristics of the 1 motor protection by lowering the actual overload current at lower Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43045 Profibus slot index 168 204 Fieldbus format mat 1 1 rpm Modbus format Ulnt Motor Poles 226 When the nominal speed of the motor is lt 500 rpm the additional menu for entering the number of poles 226 appears automatically In this menu the actual pole number can be set which will increase the control accuracy ofthe VSD o Motor Poles 8 StppyMi 4 Default 4 speeds d Motor Ven 8 st ppyMl Self Default Self None Limited I t overload curve Normal I t overload curve Means that the Self motor stands lower current at low speed Expanded It overload curve Means that the Forced motor stands almost the whole current also at lower speed Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43048 Profibus dot index 168 207 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 65 When the motor has no cooling fan None is selected and the current level is limited to 55 of rated motor current With a motor with a shaft mounted fan Self is selected and the current for overload is limited to 8
198. ilure This can be done at any level from changing settings and functions to disconnecting single control cables or replacing entire drives The Trip Log can be useful for determining whether certain trios occur at certain moments The Trip Log also records the time of the trip in relation to the run time counter WARNING If it is necessary to open the VSD or any part of the system motor cable housing conduits electrical panels cabinets etc to inspect or take measure ments as Suggested in this instruction manual it is absolutely necessary to read and follow the safety instructions in the manual 12 2 1 Technically qualified personnel Installation commissioning demounting making measurements etc of or at the variable speed drive may only be carried out by personnel technically quali fied for the task 12 2 2 Opening the variable speed drive WARNING Always switch the mains voltage off if it is necessary to open the VSD and wait at least 5 minutes to allow the capacitors to discharge WARNING In case of malfunctioning always check the DC link voltage or wait one hour after the mains voltage has been switched off before dismantling the VSD for repair The connections for the control signals and the switches are isolated from the mains voltage Always take adequate precautions before opening the variable speed drive 12 2 3 Precautions to take witha connected motor If w
199. indications is displayed area F of the display Omron SX inverter manual Troubleshooting Diagnoses and Maintenance 157 12 2 Trip conditions causes and remedial action The table later on in this section must be seen as a basic aid to find the cause of a system failure and to how to solve any problems that arise A variable speed drive is mostly just a small part of a complete VSD sys tem Sometimes it is difficult to determine the cause of the failure although the variable speed drive gives a certain trip message it is not always easy to find the right cause of the failure Good knowledge of the com plete drive system is therefore necessary Contact your supplier if you have any questions The VSD is designed in such a way that it tries to avoid trips by limiting torque overvolt etc Failures occurring during commissioning or shortly after commissioning are most likely to be caused by incorrect settings or even bad connections Failures or problems occurring after a reasonable period of failure free operation can be caused by changes in the system or in its environment e g wear Failures that occur regularly for no obvious reasons are generally caused by Electro Magnetic Interference Be sure that the installation fulfils the demands for installa tion stipulated in the EMC directives See chapter 8 page 45 Sometimes the so called Trial and error method is a quicker way to determine the cause of the fa
200. information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31023 31024 Profibus slot index 121 167 121 168 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 Modbus format Elnt The first row indicates the Analogue outputs 1AnOut 1 2AnOut 2 Reading downwards from the first row to the second row the status of the belonging output is shown in 100 AnOut1 has a negative 100 output value 65 AnOut1 has a 65 output value The example in Fig 97 indicates that both the Ana logue outputs are active NOTE The shown percentages are absolute values based on the full range scale of the in our output so related to either 0 10 V or 0 20 mA 144 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual I O board Status 728 72A Indicates the status for the additional I O on option boards 1 B1 2 B2 and 3 B3 Stp REOOO DI10 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31025 31027 Profibus slot index 121 170 172 Fieldbus format Modbus format Ulnt bit O Digln1 bit 1 DigIn2 bit 2 DigIn3 bit 8 Relayl bit 9 Relay2 bit 10 Relay3 11 7 3 Stored values 730 The shown values are the actual values built up over time Values are stored at power down and updated again at power up Run Time 731 Displays the total time that the VSD has been in the Reset Run Time 7311 Reset the run time counter The stored information will
201. installation manual For more information please contact your supplier 13 1 Options for the control panel Order number Description 01 3957 00 01 3957 01 Panel kit complete including panel Panel kit complete including blank panel Mounting cassette blank panel and straight RS232 cable are available as options for the control panel These options may be useful for example after mounting a control panel in a cabinet door Fig 101 Control panel in mounting cassette 13 2 PC Tool software The optional software that runs on a personal compu ter can be used to load parameter settings from the VSD to the PC for backup and printing Recording can be made in oscilloscope mode Please contact OMRON sales for further information 13 3 Brake chopper All VSD sizes can be fitted with an optional built in brake chopper The brake resistor must be mounted outside the VSD The choice of the resistor depends on the application switch on duration and duty cycle This option can not be after mounted WARNING The table gives the minimum values of the brake resistors Do not use resistors lower than this value The VSD can trip or even be damaged due to high braking currents AN The following formula can be used to define the power of the connected brake resistor Brake level VDC 2 Presistor x ED Rmin Where Prasistor required power of brak
202. irements for the application the shape of both the ramps can be selected For applica Range 0 50 3600 s tions where speed changes need to be started and DN stopped smoothly such as a conveyor belt with mate Communication information rials that can drop following a quick speed change the ramp shape can be adapted to a S shape and prevent Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43105 speed change shocks For applications that are not Profibus slot index 169 9 critical in this the speed change can be fully linear over the complete range Fieldbus format Long 1 0 01 Modbus format Elnt Acc Rmp St pry Linear rpm Default Linear Ee eee ete eee ES Linear 0 Linear acceleration ramp Max speed S Curve 1 S shape acceleration ramp 343 Min speed 341 Fig 55 Deceleration Time from Minimum Speed 336 If a minimum speed is programmed this parameter will be used to set the deceleration time from the mini mum speed to O rom at a stop command The ramp time is defined as the time it takes for the motor to NOTE For S curve ramps the ramp times 331 and 332 defines the maximum acceleration and deceleration rated i e linear part of S curve just as for the linear ramps The S curves are implemented so that for a speed step below sync speed the ramps are fully S shaped while for larger steps the middle part will be linear Therefore will a S curve ramp from 0 sync speed take 2 x Time whi
203. k input pump3 for Pump Fan con p 17 trol and informs about the status of the Feedb auxiliary connected pump fan p 4 Feedback input pump 4 for Pump Fan con AMP 18 trol and informs about the status of the Feedb On auxiliary connected pump fan Pump5 Feedback input pump5 for Pump Fan con a 19 trol and informs about the status of the Feedb a auxiliary connected pump fan Pump6 Feedback input pump 6 for Pump Fan con p 20 trol and informs about the status of the Feedb z auxiliary connected pump fan Timer 1 21 Timer1 Delay 643 will be activated on the rising edge of this signal Timer 2 22 Timer2 Delay 653 will be activated on the rising edge of this signal Set Ctrll 123 Activates other parameter set See Table 23 for selection possibilities SetCtri2 24 Activates other parameter set See Table 23 for selection possibilities Pre magnetises the motor Used for faster MotPreMag 25 Motor start To activate the J og function Gives a Run Jog 26 command with the set Jog speed and Direction page 97 Be aware that if there is nothing connected to the input the VSD will trip at External e 27 Motor Temp immediately p NOTE The External Motor Temp is active low Loc Rem 28 Activate local mode defined in 2171 and 2172 Activate deactivate analogue inputs Anin select 29 defined in 513A 516A 519A and 51CA Liquid cooling low level signal LC Level 30 NOTE The Liqui
204. l set via 215 Remote 1 Local Bun Stop control via remote Keyboard 2 Local Bun Stop control via keyboard Com 3 Local Run Stop control via communication Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43010 Profibus slot index 168 169 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Lock Code 218 To prevent the keyboard being used or to change the setup of the VSD and or process control the key board can be locked with a password This menu Lock Code 218 is used to lock and unlock the key board Enter the password 291 to lock unlock the keyboard operation If the keyboard is not locked default the selection Lock Code will appear If the keyboard is already locked the selection Unlock Code will appear When the keyboard is locked parameters can be viewed but not changed The reference value can be changed and the VSD can be started stopped and reversed if these functions are set to be controlled from the keyboard 0 LOC ode Stpry 0 Default 0 Range 0 9999 Rotation 219 Overall limitation of motor rotation direction This function limits the overall rotation either to left or right or both directions This limit is prior to all other selections e g if the rotation is limited to right a Run Left command will be ignored To define left and right rotation we assume that the motor is connected U U V V and W W Speed Direction
205. le a step from 0 2 x sync speed will take 3 x Time middle part 0 5sync speed 1 5sync speed linear Also valid for menu 337 D eceleration ramp type Communication information decelerate from the nominal motor speed to O rpm o Dec lt Min Spc St pry 10 05 Default 10 05 Range 0 50 3600 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43106 Profibus slot index 169 10 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 01 s Modbus format Elnt Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43107 Profibus slot index 169 11 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt rpm Linear S curve t Fig 56 Shape of acceleration ramp Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 89 Deceleration Ramp Type 338 Sets the ramp type of all deceleration parameters in a parameter set Fig 57 0 Dec Amp St ply Linear Default Linear Selection Same as menu 337 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43108 Profibus slot index 169 12 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt S curve Linear Fig 57 Shape of deceleration ramp Start Mode 339 Sets the way of starting the motor when a run com mand is given 9 Start Mode St ppyFast Default Fast fixed The motor shaft flux increases gradually The motor shaft starts rotating immedi ately once the Run command is gi
206. llection point for the recycling of electrical and elec Synchronous speed of the motor rpm f f f uate speed tronic equipment By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly you will help prevent potentially negative consequences for the environment and human health which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product The recycling of mate rials will help to conserve natural resources For more detailed information about recycling this product please contact the local distributor of the product 1 6 Glossary 1 6 1 Abbreviations and symbols In this manual the following abbreviations are used Table 2 Abbreviations Abbreviation Description symbol DSP Digital signals processor VSD Variable speed drive cp Control panel the programming and presen tation unit on the VSD Elnt Communication format Ulnt Communication format Int Communication format Long Communication format 8 The function cannot be changed in run mode 10 Introduction Omron SX inverter manual 2 Mounting This chapter describes how to mount the VSD Before mounting it is recommended that the installa tion is planned out first e Be sure that the VSD suits the mounting location e The mounting site must support the weight of the VSD e Will the VSD continuously withstand vibrations and or shocks e Consider using a vibration damper e Check ambient conditions ratings required cool ing air flow compatibility of the motor
207. llow the DC capacitors to discharge before connecting the control signals or changing position of any switches If the option External supply is used switch of the mains to the option This is done to prevent damage on the control board Communication Switches iSty 1S2y 153 y Control Panel Control signals RO2 2 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 4 42 43 Relay outputs 1 AO1 AO2 D DI5 DIE DI7 DO1 DO2 DIS NC C NO 56 7 8 10 11 x2 31 32 33 51 52 10V Ald Al2 Al3 Ad 10V 1 DI DI2 DIS 24V A3 NO C Fig 23 Control board layout Omron SX inverter manual Control Connections 27 5 2 Terminal connections The terminal strip for connecting the control signals is accessible after opening the front panel The table describes the default functions for the sig nals The inputs and outputs are programmable for other functions as described in chapter 11 page 59 For signal specifications refer to chapter 14 page 169 NOTE The maximum total combined current for outputs 11 20 and 21 is 100mA Table 12 Control signals Table 12 Control signals Terminal Name Function Default a Bee Relay 2 output 42 COM 2 Run active when the VSD is 43 N O2 started 51 COM 3 Relay 3 output 52 N O3 Off NOTE NIC is opened when the relay is active and N O is closed when the relay is active
208. logs 810 890 When the tenth trip occurs the oldest trip will disappear Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31034 Profibus slot index 121 178 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 W Modbus format Elnt Reset Energy 7331 Resets the kWh counter The stored information will be erased and a new registration period will start OX U r p message nergy Stp h mm ss Stp kWh Unit h m hours minutes Unit kWh Range Oh Om 65355h 59m Range 0 0 999999kWh BIO Ext Trip Stp 132 12 14 For fieldbus integer value of trip message see mes sage table for warnings 722 NOTE Bits 0 5 used for trip message value Bits 6 15 for internal use Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31101 NS nergy Stp No Default No Selection No Yes Communication information Profibus slot index 121 245 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Trip message 811 81N The information from the status menus are copied to the trip message log when a trip occurs Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 6 Profibus slot index 0 5 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt NOTE After reset the setting automatically goes back to No 11 8 View Trip Log 800 Main menu with parameters for viewing all the logged trip data In total the VSD
209. long as the Process value 711 stays within steady state margin When Min Speed 341 is Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43373 reached the steady state test was successful and EST E 170722 stop sleep is commanded if PID sleep function 386 rofibus slot Index and 387 is activated If the Process value 711 goes Fieldbus format Long 1 0 01 s outside the set steady state margins then the test Modbus format Elnt failed and normal PID operation will continue see Fig 69 PID Steady State Margin 389 PID steady state margin defines a margin band around the reference that defines steady state operation 711 Process Value 310 Process Ref Start steady Stop steady state test state test 712 Speed Normal PID Normal PID Steady state test Stop Sleep 341 Min Speed 386 PID lt Min Spd Fig 69 Steady state test Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 101 11 3 9 Pump Fan Control 390 The Pump Control functions are in menu 890 The function is used to control a number of drives pumps fans etc of which one is always driven by the VSD Pump enable 391 This function will enable the pump control to set all rel evant pump control functions JI Pump enable default settings View functions 39H to 39M are added in the menu structure St pry off Default Off Off O Pump control is switched off Pump contr
210. lot Index A 43001 43556 168 160 to 170 205 B 44001 44529 172 140 to 174 185 C 45001 45529 176 120 to 178 165 D 46001 46529 180 100 to 182 145 NOTE This RS232 port is not isolated Correct and safe use of a RS232 connection depends on the ground pins of both ports being the same potential Problems can occur when connecting two ports of e g machinery and computers where both ground pins are not the same potential This may cause hazardous ground loops that can destroy the RS232 ports The control panel RS232 connection is not galvanic isolated The optional RS232 485 card is galvanic isolated Parameter set A contains parameters 43001 to 43556 The parameter sets B C and D contains the same type of information For example parameter 43123 in parameter set A contain the same type of information as 44123 in parameter set B A DeviceNet instance number can easily be converted into a Profibus slot index number according to description in section section 11 8 2 page 153 10 3 Motor data Communication information for the different motors Note that the control panel RS232 connection can Modbus DeviceNet Profibus safely be used in combination with commercial available Motor instance number Slot Index isolated USB to RS232 converters M1 43041 43048 168 200 to 168 207 Omron SX inverter manual Serial communication 53 Motor M odbus DeviceNet Profibus In
211. m Speed 342 With this function it is possible to put the VSD in sleep mode when it is running at minimum speed for the length of time set due to process value feedback or a reference value that corresponds to a speed lower than the min speed set The VSD will go into sleep mode after programmed time When the reference signal or process value feedback raises the required speed value above the min speed value the VSD will automatically wake up and ramp up to the required speed NOTE Menu 386 has higher priority than menu 342 d p cht n pd St pry off Default Off Off 0 Off 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43122 Profibus slot index 169 26 Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 93 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 01 s Modbus format Elnt PID ref PID out NG_50 PC 9_1 Maximum Speed 343 Sets the maximum speed at 10 V 20 mA unless a user defined characteristic of the analogue input is programmed The synchronous speed Sync spd is determined by the parameter motor speed 225 The maximum speed will operate as an absolute maximum limit This parameter is used to prevent damage due to high speed d Max Speed Stppy Sync speed Default Sync Speed Synchronous speed i e no load SG speed speed at nominal frequency 1 24000rpm 1
212. me 0 005 328 F Val PrMax Max 386 PID lt MinSpd Off 330 Start Stop 387 PID Act Marg 0 331 Acc Time 10 00s 388 PID Stdy Tst Off 332 Dec Time 10 00s 389 PIDStdyMar 0 333 Acc MotPot 16 00s 390 Pump Fan Ctrl 334 Dec MotPot 16 005 391 Pump enable Off 335 Acc gt Min Spd 10 00s 392 No of Drives 2 336 Dec lt MinSpd 10 00s 393 Select Drive Sequence 337 Acc Rmp Linear 394 Change Cond Both 338 DecRmp Linear 395 Change Timer 50h 339 Start Mode Fast 396 Drives on Ch 0 33A Spinstart Off 397 Upper Band 10 338 Stop Mode Decel 398 Lower Band 10 Menu List Omron SX inverter manual DEFAULT CUSTOM DEFAULT CUSTOM 399 Start Delay Os 41C5 Load Curve 5 100 39A Stop Delay Os 41C6 Load Curve 6 100 398 UppBandLim 0 41C7 Load Curve7 100 390 LowBand Lim 0 4ics Load Curve8 100 39D Settle Start Os 41C9 LoadCurve9 100 39E TransS Start 60 420 Process Prot 39F Settle Stop Os 421 Low Volt OR On 396 TransS Stop 60 422 RotorLocked Off 39H Run Time 1 00 00 00 423 Motor lost Off 39H1 Rst Run Tm1 No 424 Overvolt Ctrl On 391 Run Time 2 00 00 00 500 I Os 3911 Rst Run Tm2 No 510 An Inputs 39 Run Time 3 00 00 00 511
213. meter set B is loaded C 3 Data from parameter set C is loaded D 4 Data from parameter set D is loaded Data from parameter sets A B Cand D are SE g loaded Parameter set A and Motor data are peut g loaded B4Mot 7 Parameter set B and Motor data are loaded Parameter set C and Motor data are eat 8 loaded D Mot 9 Parameter set D and Motor data are loaded Parameter sets A B C D and Motor data DET DAL ID are loaded M1 11 Data from motor 1 is loaded M2 12 Data from motor 2 is loaded M3 13 Data from motor 3 is loaded M4 14 Data from motor 4 is loaded eis 15 Data from motor 1 2 3 and 4 are loaded All 16 All data is loaded from the control panel Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43025 Profibus slot index 168 184 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt NOTE Loading from the control panel will not affect the value in menu 310 11 2 7 Trip Autoreset Trip Conditions 250 The benefit of this feature is that occasional trips that do not affect the process will be automatically reset Only when the failure keeps on coming back recurring at defined times and therefore cannot be solved by the VSD will the unit give an alarm to inform the operator that attention is required For all trip functions that can be activated by the user you can select to control the motor down to zero speed according to
214. mron SX inverter manual Menu List 187 89E DigOut status DEFAULT CUSTOM 89F Anlin status 1 2 89G Anin status 3 4 89H AnOut status 1 2 891 IO Status Bl 89 IO Status B2 89K IO Status B3 89L Run Time 89M Mains Time 89N Energy sao Reset Trip No 900 System Data 920 VSD Data 921 VSD Type 922 Software 923 Unit name 0 188 Menu List Omron SX inverter manual Index Symbols 10VDC Supply voltage unennenneenenesesnenennnennnen nen 179 24VDC Supply voltage nenenneenenesesnenennnennen nen 179 Numerics 10VDC Supply voltage ennennennneenenensnnenennennnn 179 4 D0MA RL ick eee EH 122 A Abbreviations lloros EE 10 Acceleration ee diced edu Dei ansehen 89 91 Acceleration rap ungelesenen 91 Acceleration time ueseneenenenesesnnnenenennenenennnesennennnen 89 Ramptyperaeinesss seen a 91 Alarmitrip ones 114 Alternating MASTER A 106 Ambient temperature and derating nennenenee 172 Analogue comparators u eenesseeneneneseenenenenennenenennenn ne 136 Analogue input nahen 119 Alli Aen ener 119 A bet e 124 125 OFS Eb Geert ta TEN 121 129 Analogue Output coonocccononcnnnnnnnncnnononinonononoos 128 131 179 AnOut leugnen 128 131 Output configuration esseere 129 132 AND Operator estoica as 140 EE 125 ADO E 125 ADINA A savcva stoves ceveveavevecveaveviureveevivense 126 Autoreset ccee
215. n trol cables with plaited flexible wire up to 1 5 mm or solid wire up to 2 5 mm 9 Connect a reference value between terminals 7 Common and 2 Anin 1 as in Fig 22 10 Connect an external start button between terminal 11 24 VDC and 9 Digln2 RUNR as in Fig 22 Reference 4 20 mA co noo o won IX Start o i 23 RN x 41 42 43 31 32 33 EX Fig 22 Wiring 4 3 2 Switch on the mains Close the door to the VSD Once the mains is switched on the internal fan in the VSD will run for 5 seconds 4 3 3 Set the Motor Data Enter correct motor data for the connected motor The motor data is used in the calculation of complete operational data in the VSD Change settings using the keys on the control panel For further information about the control panel and menu structure see the chapter 9 page 47 Menu 100 Preferred View is displayed when started 1 Press to display menu 200 Main Setup 2 Press E and then 5 to display menu 220 Motor Data 3 Press E to display menu 221 and set motor volt age 4 Change the value using the A and Y keys Con firm with J 5 Set motor frequency 222 24 Getting Started Omron SX inverter manual Set motor power 223 Set motor current 224 oN Set motor speed 225 9 Set power factor cos p 227 10 Select supply voltage level used 21B 11 229 Motor ID run Choose Short confirm wi
216. n 4 74 Digital input 4 ID1 33 Digital comp 1 inverted output Digin 5 75 Digital input 5 CD 2 34 Digital comparator 2 output Digin 6 76 Digital input 6 ID2 35 Digital comp 2 inverted output Digin 7 77 Digital input 7 Run command is active or VSD run Digin 8 78 Digital input 8 Operation 36 ning The signal can be used to con p trol the mains contactor if the VSD is Active trip that needs to be manually ManRst Trip 79 equipped with Standby supply option reset T1Q 37 Timerl output Com Error 80 Serial communication lost T1Q 38 Timerl inverted output External Fan 81 ee cooling T2Q 39 Timer2 output i T20 40 Timer2 inverted output LC Pump 82 Activate liquid cooling pump S Activate liqui ling heat exchanger Sleeping 41 Sleeping function activated LC HE Fan 83 Se e liquid cooling heat exchange EE AED E TON deviation LC Level 84 Liquid cooling low level signal active EE EE Run Right 85 Positive speed gt 0 5 i e forward PumpSlave2 44 Activate pump slave 2 g clockwise direction PumpSlave3 45 Activate pump slave 3 Negative speed lt 0 5 i e reverse SE ES counter clockwise direction PumpSlave4 46 Activate pump slave 4 y Pumpslaves 47 Activate pump slave 5 Com Active 87 Fieldbus communication active PumpSlaves 48 Activate pump slave 6 Brk Fault 88 Tripped on brake fault not released 7 Warning and continued operation PumpMaster1 43 lada BrkNotEngage 89 keep torque due to Brake not PumpMast
217. n Pre Alarm Margin is a percentage of nominal motor torque 416 M nPreAlMar Stop 10 Default 10 Range 0 400 Communication information Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 43328 Profibus slot index 169 232 110 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual Fieldbus format Long 1 1 Modbus format Elnt Min Pre Alarm Response delay 4182 Sets the delay time between the first occurrence of min pre alarm condition and after when the alarm is Min Alarm Response delay 4192 Sets the delay time between the first occurrence of min alarm condition and after when the alarm is given 419 Mi nAl ar mDe St pry 0 1s Default Ols Range 0 90 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43333 Profibus slot index 169 237 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 1 s Modbus format Elnt given 4182 Mi nPreAl De St pry 0 1s Default 0 15 Range 0 90 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43332 Profibus slot index 169 236 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 1 s Modbus format Elnt Min Alarm 419 Min Alarm Margin 4191 Autoset Alarm 41A The Autoset Alarm function can measure the nominal load that is used as reference for the alarm levels If the selected Load Type 415 is Basic it copies the load the motor is running with to the menu Normal Load 41B
218. n SX inverter manual Introduction 9 1 5 Dismantling and scrapping The enclosures of the drives are made from recyclable material as aluminium iron and plastic Each drive contains a number of components demanding special 1 6 2 Definitions In this manual the following definitions for current torque and frequency are used treatment for example electrolytic capacitors The cir Table3 Definitions cuit boards contain small amounts of tin and lead Any Name Description Quantity local or national regulations in force for the disposal and recycling of these materials must be complied liN Nominal input current of VSD ARMS wih Inom Nominal output current of VSD Arms IMOT Nominal motor current ARMS 1 5 1 Disposal of old electrical and 7 i Prom Nominal power of VSD kW electronic equipment gt m m ee otor power This information is applicable in the European Union MOT i i and other European countries with separate collection Tyom Nominal torque of motor Nm systems Tmor Motor torque Nm four Output frequency of VSD Hz for Nominal frequency of motor Hz Nor Nominal speed of motor rpm lo Maximum output current Arms This symbol on the product or on its packaging indi Speed Actual motor speed rpm cates that this product shall be treated according to Torque Actual motor torque Nm the WEEE Directive It must be taken to the applicable Sync co
219. n before the pump control contin ues If an additional pump is started D O L Direct On Line or Y A the flow or pressure can still fluctuate due to the rough start stop method This could cause unnecessary starting and stopping of additional pumps During the Settle start e PID controller is off e The speed is kept at a fixed level after adding a pump ID Settle Star St oU Os Default 05 Range 0 999 s Communication information Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 43173 Profibus slot index 169 77 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 s Modbus format Elnt Transition Speed Start 39E The transition speed start is used to minimize a flow pressure overshoot when adding another pump When an additional pump needs to be switched on the master pump will slow down to the set transition speed start value before the additional pump is started The setting depends on the dynamics of both the master drive and the additional drives The transition speed is best set by trial and error In general e lf the additional pump has slow start stop dynam ics then a higher transition speed should be used e Ifthe additional pump has fast start stop dynam ics then a lower transition speed should be used J rans ar Stop 60 Default 60 Range 0 100 of total min speed to max speed Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no
220. n keys The function keys operate the menus and are also used for programming and read outs of all the menu settings Table 18 Function keys 9 3 The menu structure The menu structure consists of 4 levels aa The first character in the menu number 2nd level The second character in the menu number 3rd level The third character in the menu number 4th level The fourth character in the menu number This structure is consequently independent of the number of menus per level For instance a menu can have one selectable menu Set View Reference Value 310 or it can have 17 selectable menus menu Speeds 340 NOTE If there are more than 10 menus within one level the numbering continues in alphabetic order step to a lower menu level confirm a changed setting ENTER key step to a higher menu level ESCAPE key ignore a changed setting without confirming step to a previous menu within the same PREVIOUS key level digit in edit mode PREV NEXT 500 77 700 MAIN MENU ENTER ie ESC SUBMENU 1 420 420 tens o o 200 300 PREV NEXT step to a next menu within the same level go to less significant digit in edit mode goto more significant X NEXT key Sy decrease a value key change a selection increase a value change a selection Va key Fig 43 Menu structu
221. n mechanical overload on the motor or the machinery bearings gearboxes chains belts etc Check the motor cooling system Self cooled motor at low speed too high load Set PTC menu 237 to OFF Motor lost Phase loss or too great imbalance on the motor phases Check the motor voltage on all phases Check for loose or poor motor cable connections If all connections are OK contact your supplier Set motor lost alarm to OFF Locked rotor Ext trip Torque limit at motor standstill Mechanical blocking of the rotor External input DigIn 1 8 active active low function on the input Check for mechanical problems at the motor or the machinery connected to the motor Set locked rotor alarm to OFF Check the equipment that initiates the external input Check the programming of the digital inputs DigIn 1 8 Ext Mot Temp External input DigIn 1 8 active active low function on the input Check the equipment that initiates the external input Check the programming of the digital inputs Digin 1 8 Mon MaxAlarm Max alarm level overload has been reached Check the load condition of the machine Check the monitor setting in section 11 6 page 136 Mon MinAlarm Min alarm level underload has been reached Check the load condition of the machine Check the monitor setting in section 11 6 page 136 Comm error PT100 Error on serial communication option Motor PT
222. ndex 170 62 ID2 7 Fieldbus format Ulnt LZ LY 8 Modbus format Ulnt ILZ LY 9 Tl 10 ITI 11 T2 12 IT2 13 Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 135 Y Operator 2 624 Selects the second operator for the logic Y function 524 Y Operator 11 6 3 Logic Output Z 630 Stppy CA1 amp A2 amp CD1 The expression must be programmed by means of the St py amp Default amp When dot is selected the Logic Y 0 expression is finished when only two expressions are tied together amp 1 amp AND 2 0R E 3 EXOR Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43414 Profibus slot index 170 63 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Y Comp 3 625 Selects the third comparator for the logic Y function 0 Y Comp St pry CD1 Default CD1 Selection Same as menu 621 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43415 Profibus slot index 170 64 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt menus 631 to 635 ZComp 1 631 Selects the first comparator for the logic Z function 0 omp St pry CAl Default CA1 Selection Same as menu 621 Communication information Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 43421 Profibus slot index 170 70 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Z Operator 1 632 Select
223. ng NEMA ratings Table 45 Types and fuses Input Mains input fuses Model SE UL Ferraz Shawmut Class J TD A type SX D4090 EV 152 175 AJT175 SX D4110 EV 182 200 A T200 SX D4132 EV 216 250 A T250 SX 4160 EV 260 300 AJT300 SX 4200 EV 324 350 AJT350 SX 4220 EV 372 400 AJT400 SX 4250 EV 432 500 AJT500 SX 4315 EV 520 600 AJT600 SX 4355 EV 562 600 AJT600 SX 4400 EV 648 700 A4BQ700 SX 4450 EV 744 800 A4BQ800 SX 4500 EV 864 1000 A4BQ1000 SX 4630 EV 1037 1200 A4BQ1200 SX 4800 EV 1296 1500 A4BQ1500 Omron SX inverter manual Technical Data 177 Table 46 Type cables cross sections and glands Cable cross section connector Mains and motor Brake PE Model Cable type Tightening Tightening Tightening Range torque Range torque Range torque Nm ft Ibf Nm ft Ibf Nm ft Ibf AWG 1 AWG 3 0 14 10 5 AWG 4 AWG 3 0 AWG 1 AWG 3 0 14 10 5 SXD4090 EV AWG 4 0 300 kcmil 24 18 147105 awe 4 AWG 2 0 10 7 5 SX D4110 EV AWG 1 AWG 3 0 AWG 3 0 400 kcmil Bu ee ee ec SX D4132 EV 400 kcmil GE 24 18 kemil 10 7 5 SX 4160 EV S A 2 xAWG 4 0 24 18 2 x AWG 3 0 24 18 Sa i SX 4200 EV 2 x300 kcmil 2 x 400 kcmil SX 4220 EV 2 x AWG 3 0 2 x AWG 3 0 SX A250 EV 12 x400 kcmil A iia ame SE SX 4315 EV 3 x AWG 4 0 2 x AWG 3 0 SX 4355 EV 3 x 300 kcmil 24 18 2 x400 kcmil 24 18 frame
224. ngs for the application Usu ally most parameters are common and therefore it saves a lot of work by copying set A gt B in menu 242 When parameter set A is copied to set B you only change the parameters in the set that need to be changed Repeat for C and D if used With menu 242 Copy Set it is easy to copy the complete contents of a single parameter set to another parameter set If for example the parameter sets are selected via digital inputs Digln 3 is set to Set Ctrl 1 in menu 523 and Digln 4 is set to Set Ctrl 2 in menu 524 they are activated as in Table 14 Activate the parameter changes via digital input by setting menu 241 Select Set to Digln Table 14 Parameter set Set Ctrl 2 Set Ctrl 1 Parameter set NOTE The selection via the digital inputs is immediately activated The new parameter settings will be activated on line also during Run NOTE The default parameter set is parameter set A Omron SX inverter manual Main Features 35 Examples Different parameter sets can be used to easily change the setup of a VSD to adapt quickly to different appli cation requirements For example when e a process needs optimized settings in different stages of the process to increase the process quality increase control accuracy lower maintenance costs increase operator safety With these settings a large number of options are available Som
225. nly valid if this parameter is never set 220 240 V 1 Only valid for SX V 4 400V 380 415 V 3 Only valid for SX V 4 400V 440 480 V 4 Only valid for SX V 4 400V 500 525 V 5 Only valid for SX V 6 690V 550 600 V 6 Only valid for SX V 6 690V 660 690 V 7 Only valid for SX V 6 690V Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43381 Profibus slot index 170 30 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 63 11 2 4 Motor Data 220 In this menu you enter the motor data to adapt the VSD to the connected motor This will increase the control accuracy as well as different read outs and analogue output signals Motor M1 is selected as default and motor data entered will be valid for motor M1 If you have more than one motor you need to select the correct motor in menu 212 before entering motor data NOTE The parameters for motor data cannot be changed during run mode NOTE The default settings are for a standard 4 pole motor according to the nominal power of the VSD Motor Frequency 222 Set the nominal motor frequency Motor Freq 8 stpgyMi 50Hz Default 50 Hz Range 24 300 Hz Resolution 1 Hz Communication information NOTE Parameter set cannot be changed during run if the sets is set for different motors NOTE Motor Data in the dif
226. ns Options Letter means no character Control panel Standard control panel Std PPU A Blank control panel Blank PPU Built in EMC filter Standard EMC inside Category C3 B IT Net filter disconnected from ground No brake chopper or DC connection included No cabinet output options included VI dU dt filter included W dU dt filter Overshoot clamp included X Sinusfilter included 1 4 Standards The variable speed drives described in this instruction manual comply with the standards listed in Table 1 For the declarations of conformity and manufacturer s certificate contact your supplier for more information 1 4 1 Product standard for EMC Geer Ke c Brake chopper DC connection Product standard EN IEC 61800 3 second edition of included 2004 defines the D Only DC connection included n First Environment Extended EMC as environment Standby power Not included that includes domestic premises It also includes supply E Standby power supply included establishments directly connected without intermedi 2 Not included ate transformers to a low voltage power supply net Safe stop F Safe stop included work that supplies buildings used for domestic Control type de GC F Direct Torque Control 8 Introduction Omron SX inverter manual
227. nt The Brake not engaged warning is using the setting of parameter Brake Engaged time 33E Following Figure shows principle of brake operation for fault during run left and during stop right 92 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual release time 133Cl Start 1 1 l l Running A Torque 17 L l Speed gt 0 I I Brake relay ees DEE l mmm t acknowledge ES Il I I Brake Trip E EE lt 33H 33H Brake warning Brake Fault trip time During run release time Brake wait Brake engage ined time time ey 133F 33E During stop Fig 59 Principle of brake operation for fault during run and during stop 11 3 5 Speed 340 Menu with all parameters for settings regarding to speeds such as Min Max speeds Jog speeds Skip speeds Minimum Speed 341 Sets the minimum speed The minimum speed will operate as an absolute lower limit Used to ensure the motor does not run below a certain speed and to maintain a certain performance 4 Min Speed St ply Orpm Default 0 rpm Range 0 Max Speed Dependent on Set View ref 310 NOTE A lower speed value than the set minimum speed can be shown in the display due to motor slip Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43121 Profibus dot index 169 25 Fieldbus format Int 1 1 rpm Modbus format Int 1 1 rpm Stop Sleep when less than Minimu
228. nt mode EEEE 2 complement signed exponent MMMMMMMMMMM 2 complement signed mantissa If the format bit is O then can a positive number O 32767 be represented by bit 0 14 If the format bit is 1 then is the number interpreted as this Value M 104E NOTE Parameters with Elnt format may return values in both formats F 0 or F 1 Example If you write the value 1004 to a register and this regis ter has 3 significant digits it will be stored as 1000 In the floating point format F 1 one 16 bit word is used to represent large or very small numbers with 3 significant digits If data is read or written as a fixed point i e no deci mals number between 0 32767 the 15 bit fixed point format F 0 may be used F Format 1 floating point format O 15 bit as 15 bit fixed point format The matrix below describes the contents of the 16 bit word for the two different Elnt formats B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 BA B3 B2 Bl BO F 1 e3 ei el e0 mlO m9 m8 m7 m6 m5 m4 m3 m2 ml m0 F 0 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 BS BA B3 B2 Bl BO Example of floating point format e3 e0 4 bit signed exponent 8 7 binary 1000 0111 m10 m0 11 bit signed mantissa 1024 1023 binary 10000000000 01111111111 A signed number should be represented as a two complement binary number like below Value Binary 8 1000 7 1001 2 1110 1 1111 0 0000 1 0001 2 0010 6 0110 7 0111 The value repres
229. nual Installation 21 ER Installation Omron SX inverter manual 4 Getting Started This chapter is a step by step guide that will show you the quickest way to get the motor shaft turning We will show you two examples remote control and local control We assume that the VSD is mounted on a wall or ina cabinet as in the chapter 2 page 11 First there is general information of how to connect mains motor and control cables The next section describes how to use the function keys on the control panel The subsequent examples covering remote control and local control describe how to program set the motor data and run the VSD and motor 4 1 Connect the mains and motor cables Dimension the mains and motor cables according to local regulations The cable must be able to carry the VSD load current 4 1 1 Mains cables 7 Connect the mains cables as in Fig 20 The VSD has as standard a built in RFI mains filter that complies with category C3 which suits the Second Environment standard 4 1 2 Motorcables 8 Connect the motor cables as in Fig 20 To comply with the EMC Directive you have to use screened cables and the motor cable screen has to be con nected on both sides to the housing of the motor and the housing of the VSD RFI Filter Mains Metal EMC cable glands 0 Screened cables Metal housing Output
230. nverter manual Functional Description 141 DC Link Voltage 719 Displays the actual DC link voltage 5 DC Voltage Stp V Unit V Resolution IV Communication information 11 7 2 Status 720 VSD Status 721 Indicates the overall status of the variable speed drive VSD atus Stp 1 222 333 44 Fig 92 VSD status Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31010 Display Ze Status Value Profibus slot index 121 154 position Fieldbus format Long 1 0 1 V 1 Parameter Set A B C D Modbus format Elnt Key keyboard Source of reference Rem remote 222 a value Com Serial comm Heatsink Temperature 71A Opt option Displays the actual heatsink temperature Source of Run ER 333 Stop Reset com c ial a mahd Com Seria comm E eatsin p Opt option tp TL Torque Limit Unit C SL Speed Limit 44 Limit functions CL Current Limit Resolution 0 1 C VL Voltage Limit No limit active Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31011 Profibus slot index 121 155 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 1 C Modbus format Elnt PT100_1 2 3 Temp 71B Displays the actual PT100 temperature 8 PT100 1 2 Stp C Unit C Resolution 1 C Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31012 31013 31014 Profibus slot index 121 1
231. ode when the process value is at it s set point and the motor is run ning at minimum speed for the length of the time set in 386 By going into sleep mode the by the application consumed energy is reduced to a minimum When the process feedback value goes below the set margin on the process reference as set in 387 the VSD will wake up automatically and normal PID operation con tinues see examples PID sleep when less than minimum speed 386 If the PID output is equal to or less than minimum speed for given delay time the VSD will go to sleep 56 PI D lt MIn p 0 Stpyy off Default Off Range Off 0 01 3600 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43371 Profibus slot index 170 20 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 01 s Modbus format Elnt NOTE Menu 386 has higher priority than menu 342 PID Activation Margin 387 The PID activation wake up margin is related to the process reference and sets the limit when the VSD should wake up start again 5 PID Act Marg Stpry Orpm Default 0 Range 0 10000 in Process unit Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43372 Profibus slot index 170 21 Fieldbus format Long Modbus format Elnt NOTE The margin is always a positive value Example 1 PID control normal flow or pres sure control 321 F Anin 322 Bar 3
232. ol is on Pump control parameters 392 to 39G On q appear and are activated according to Number of Drives 392 Sets the total number of drives which are used includ ing the Master VSD The setting here depends on the parameter Select Drive 893 After the number of drives is chosen it is important to set the relays for the pump control If the digital inputs are also used for sta tus feedback these must be set for the pump control according to Pump 1 OK Pump6 OK in menu 520 92 No of Drives St pry 1 Default 1 1 3 Number of drives if UO Board is not used Number of drives if Alternating MASTER is 1 6 used see Select Drive 393 I O Board is used Number of drives if Fixed MASTER is used 1 7 see Select Drive 393 I O Board is used Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43161 Profibus slot index 169 65 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt NOTE Used relays must be defined as Slave Pump or Master Pump Used digital inputs must be defined as Pump Feedback Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43162 Profibus slot index 169 66 Fieldbus format Unt Modbus format Ulnt Select Drive 393 Sets the main operation of the pump system Sequence and Runtime are Fixed MASTER opera tion All means Alternating MASTER operation 9 elect Drive St ply
233. old level of 4 mA 3 the motor speed will now follow the reference signal T During this period the motor speed will follow the refer ence signal 4 The reference signal reaches the threshold level motor speed is 0 rpm mode RUN The reference signal passes the Level HI value from 5 above negative edge the comparator CA1 output stays high mode RUN The reference signal passes the Level LO value from 6 above negative edge the comparator CA1 out put STOP Analogue Comparator 1 Level High 612 Selects the analogue comparator constant high level according to the selected value in menu 611 Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 43402 Profibus slot index 170 51 Long 1 1 W 0 1 A 0 1 V 0 1 Hz 0 1 C 1 kWh 1H 1 1 rpm or 0 001 via process value Fieldbus format Modbus format Elnt Example This example describes the normal use of the con stant level high and low Menu Function Setting 343 Max Speed 1500 611 CA1 Value Speed 612 CA1 Level HI 300 rpm 613 CA1 Level LO 200 rpm 561 VC1 Dest Timer 1 562 VCI Source CA1 The default value is 300 We 343 E i We g en ei _ CAL Level HI 612 NA rpm A Hysteresis i 200 aaia EN naal E oon EE Default 300 rpm CAL Level LO 613 Range Enter a value for the high level Mode
234. or from overload as published in the standard IEC 60947 4 2 It does this using Motor I2t Current 232 as a reference The Motor Dr Time 233 is used to define the time behaviour of the function The current set in 232 can be delivered infinite in time If for instance in 233 a time of 1000 s is chosen the upper curve of Fig 50 is valid The value on the x axis is the multiple of the current chosen in 232 The time 233 is the time that an overloaded motor is St ply 100 Default 100 of Imor Range 0 150 of Imor Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43062 Profibus slot index 168 221 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 Modbus format Elnt NOTE When the selection Limit is set in menu 231 the value must be above the no load current of the motor 68 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual Motor 12t Time 233 Sets the time of the Et function After this time the limit for the Dt is reached if operating with 120 of the It current value Valid when start from O rpm NOTE Not the time constant of the motor 233 Mot I t Time StppyM1 60s Default 60s Range 60 1200 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43063 Profibus slot index 168 222 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 s Modbus format Elnt 100000 10000 t s 1000 100 E 60 s 120 120 s 120
235. ork must be carried out on a connected motor or on the driven machine the mains voltage must always first be disconnected from the variable speed drive Wait at least 5 minutes before continuing 12 2 4 Autoreset Trip If the maximum number of Trips during Autoreset has been reached the trip message hour counter is marked with an A 830 OVERVOLT G Trp A 345 45 12 Fig 100 Autoreset trip Fig 100 shows the 3rd trip memory menu 830 Over voltage G trip after the maximum Autoreset attempts took place after 345 hours 45 minutes and 12 sec onds of run time 158 Troubleshooting Diagnoses and Maintenance Omron SX inverter manual Table 28 Trip condition their possible causes and remedial action Trip condition Possible Cause Remedy Motor lt 121 PTC Hr value is exceeded Overload on the motor according to the programmed I t settings Motor thermistor PTC exceeds maximum level NOTE Only valid if option board PTC PT100 is used Check on mechanical overload on the motor orthe machinery bearings gearboxes chains belts etc Change the Motor I t Current setting Check on mechanical overload on the motor or the machinery bearings gearboxes chains belts etc Check the motor cooling system Self cooled motor at low speed too high load Set PTC menu 234 to OFF Motor PTC Motor thermistor PTC exceeds maximum level NOTE Only valid if 237 is enabled Check o
236. orrect connection of the mains voltage and in particular against connection of the mains voltage to the motor outlets U V and W The variable speed drive can be damaged in this way Stop motion mechanical device to ensure safety The inverter controls the motor electrically but has no means to stop it mechanically under some types of failures In applications where mechanical stop is required to a degree of safety a safety assurance study should be carried out to determine the need of additional mechanical braking devices Braking resistor and regenerative braking units In case the application needs it be sure to use a specified type of braking resistor regenera tive braking unit In case of a braking resistor install a thermal relay that monitors the tem perature of the resistor Not doing so might result in a burn due to the heat generated in the braking resistor regenerative braking unit Configure a sequence that enables the Inverter power to turn off when unusual overheating is detected in the braking resistor regenerative braking unit Electric protection of installation Take safety precautions such as setting up a molded case circuit breaker MCCB or fuses that matches the Inverter capacity on the power supply side Not doing so might result in damage to property due to the short circuit of the load Wiring works and servicing the inverter Wiring work must be carried out only by qualified personnel No
237. ors 610 The comparators available make it possible to monitor different internal signals and values and visualize via digital output or a contact when a specific value or status is reached or established There are 2 analogue comparators that compare any available analogue value including the analogue refer ence inputs with two adjustable constants For the two analogue comparators two different con stants are available Level HI and Level LO With these two levels it is possible to create a clear hysteresis for the analogue comparator between setting and reset ting the comparator output This function gives a clear difference in switching levels which lets the process adapt until a certain action is started With such a hys teresis even an instable analogue signal can be moni tored without getting a nervous comparator signal Another function is to get a clear indication that a cer tain situation has occurred the comparator can latch by set Level LO to a higher value than Level HI There are 2 digital comparators that compare any available digital signal The output signals of these comparators can be logi cally tied together to yield a logical output signal All the output signals can be programmed to the dig ital or relay outputs or used as a source for the virtual connections 560 Analogue Comparator 1 Value 611 Selection of the analogue value for Analogue Compa rator 1 CA1 Analogue comparator 1
238. pective parame ter Fieldbus format Depends on parameter see respective parame ter Modbus format Example Fig 98 shows the third trip memory menu 830 Over temperature trip occurred after 1396 hours and 13 minutes in Run time 530 Over temp Stp 1396h 13m Fig 98 Trip 3 11 8 2 Trip Messages 820 890 Same information as for menu 810 Communication information Trip log list 31151 31185 31201 31235 31251 31285 31301 31335 31351 31385 31401 31435 31451 31485 31501 31535 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no rip log list 122 40 122 74 122 90 122 124 122 140 122 174 122 190 122 224 122 240 123 18 123 35 123 68 123 85 123 118 123 135 123 168 Profibus slot index OANA Un P UN Zi O 00 O Ul la UY N Depends on parameter see respec Fieldbus format tive parameter Depends on parameter see respec Modbus format tive parameter All nine alarm lists contain the same type of data For example DeviceNet parameter 31101 in alarm list 1 contains the same data information as 31151 in alarm list 2 It is possible to read all parameters in alarm lists 2 9 by recalculating the DeviceNet instance number into a Profibus slot index number This is done in the following way slot no abs dev instance no 1 255 index no dev instance no 1 modulo 255 dev instance no slot nox255 index no 1 Example We want to read out the process value out from
239. peed WEE 93 Remote control un 38 Reset command eg delt bis 126 Reser control tet an klingen 61 Resolution timido da 59 RE mains filter isa dia 17 Rotation alocada 63 RS232 485 2 a e a 81 RUN EE 48 Ruin command rn ernst 48 Run Left commande 126 Run Right commande 126 Running mot r tg ee ice tacna ds 92 S Select Drive iiaea EEEE ENA 105 Settle Time 109 SELUP MEN ee eeh Eed AE 50 Menu Structure unseren 50 Signal store 179 Single ended connection enneseseseneneneneseenenenenennenenen 31 SO diia 154 Sound characteristics pie 67 Speed EE 146 Speed Mode seinen 60 Spinst rt ET 92 Standards u a tn 8 Start Darin e sense 108 Start Stop settings serene ai nenn nenn 89 Status indications u 47 STOP categories ann nie 45 Stop command 126 Stop Delay cont iia ERBas 108 Stripping lengths si c cscs s cscesesscessdestedesasnseddecsaossntsconace 20 Switches tania 28 Switching frequency sinureni inn nenn 67 Switching in motor cables enenensennenennnennnen 19 Omron SX inverter manual 193 7 Terminal connections scccccscesssessessscssessecsecssecseeseeaee 28 Test EE 66 Limes E E EE EEE 106 O A R a 59 97 Transition Frequency simooniaga a 109 BR 48 Trip causes and remidial action neneeenneeneenen 158 Trips warnings and limits esseere 157 Twisted EE 32 BE EE 154 Type code number rs gege d et eise Ed 8 U Undetload 2 u a ia 40 Underload alarm enh areires inerea nna
240. pressed The Acc MotPot 333 and Dec MotPot 334 are used Normal 0 MotPot 1 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43139 Profibus dot index 169 43 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt 98 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual NOTE When Key Ref Mode is set to MotPot the reference value ramp times are according to the Acc MotPot 333 and Dec MotPot 334 settings Actual speed ramp will be limited according to Acc Time 331 and Dec Time 332 Modbus format Elnt 11 3 8 PID Process Control 380 The PID controller is used to control an external proc ess via a feedback signal The reference value can be set via analogue input Anin1 at the Control Panel 310 by using a Preset Reference or via serial com munication The feedback signal actual value must be connected to an analogue input that is set to the function Process Value Process PID Control 381 This function enables the PID controller and defines the response to a changed feedback signal Process erence A Process VSD y PID Process feedback 06 F95 91 PID Contro St pry Off Default Off Off 0 PID control deactivated The speed increases when the feedback On 1 value decreases PID settings according to menus 382 to 385 The speed decreases when the feedback Invert 2 value
241. protected by an internal protection for thermal overload When this protection is activated the VSD should wait until the motor is cooled down enough before resuming normal operation When this problem occurs three times in a short period of time external assistance is required The following settings should be applied e Insert maximum number of restarts set menu 251 to3 e Activate Motor Et to be automatically reset set menu 25A to 300 s e Set relay 1 menu 551 to AutoRst Trip a signal will be available when the maximum number of restarts is reached and the VSD stays in fault condition e The reset input must be constantly activated 7 1 5 Reference priority The active speed reference signal can be programmed from several sources and functions The table below shows the priority of the different functions with regards to the speed reference Table 15 Reference priority i See Motor Pot Ref Signal On Off On Off On Off Option cards On On Off On Off Jog Ref Off On On Off Preset Ref Off Off On Motor pot commands 7 1 6 Preset references The VSD is able to select fixed speeds via the control of digital inputs This can be used for situations where the required motor speed needs to be adapted to fixed values according to certain process conditions Up to 7 preset references can be set for each parame ter set which can be selected via all digital inouts that are se
242. pulses per St PLY 3 00kHz rotation for your encoder i e it is encoder specific For more information please see the encoder manual Default 3 00 kHz Range 1 50 6 00kHz nc Pulses Resolution 0 01kHz 8 StppyM 1024 Communication information Default 1024 Range 5 16384 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43053 Profibus lot index 168 212 Communication information Fieldbus format Long 1 1Hz Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43052 Modbus format Elnt Profibus slot index 168 211 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 pulse Modbus format Elnt Encoder Speed 22D Only visible if the Encoder option board is installed This parameter shows the measured motor speed To check if the encoder is correctly installed set Encoder feedback 22B to Off run the VSD at any speed and compare with the value in this menu The value in this menu 22D should be about the same as the motor Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 67 PWM Mode 22E2 switched off or is reduced in power at 1 2 times the current set in 232 231 Mot I t Type D VARV V O H e St ply Standard Default Standard Standard Standard Sine Filt Sine Filter mode for use with output Sine Filters StppyMl Trip Default Off Trip 2 t motor protection is not active When the I ttime is exceeded the VSD will Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43054
243. py Non Volatie Default Non Volatile After a stop trip or power down the VSD Volatile 0 will start always from zero speed or mini mum speed if selected Non Volatile After a stop trip or power down of the VSD the reference value at Non volatile 1 the moment of the stop will be memo rized After a new start command the out put speed will resume to this saved value Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43131 Profibus slot index 169 35 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 97 Motpot GC j UP Motpot Fig 65 MotPot function Preset Ref 1 362 to Preset Ref 7 368 Preset speeds have priority over the analogue inputs Preset speeds are activated by the digital inputs The digital inputs must be set to the function Pres Ref 1 Pres Ref 2 or Pres Ref 4 Depending on the number of digital inputs used up to 7 preset speeds can be activated per parameter set Using all the parameter sets up to 28 preset speeds are possible 0 Preset Re St ply Orpm Default Speed 0 rom Dependent on Process Source 321 and Process Unit 322 0 max speed 343 Torque mode 0 max torque 351 Speed mode Min according to menu 324 max according Other modes to menu 325 Communication information 43132 43138 169 36 16
244. r functions for constant torque applications 40 Main Features Omron SX inverter manual 964 90 11 um gt sT 0 PQuUeNUIW Z6 Tb uueje a1d 3514 a10Jaq pasde oq ISNW sz0 Aea vers y Tb ENHE deje aid ou aswuauyzo 4 4 JO P Bq ISNW ST 0 pauueyum ZETH lll 111 7 gt STO PANWe4dUIN 78TH ST PaNe4dUIW 78TH Jeje a1d ou aswusyjo 41 10 gt aq INW TTT lt gt ST 0 Pavauken ZLIH s 3 HH ST 0 pauuenxen Z9Tr lt gt i N i ST 0 pauuemxen Z9Tr UIINOXeW JO xeWE Peles Ue TTV UIINOXe JO xXeW PPS wey TL UINOXe JO XeWEDeI ES une TTH UIINOXeW JO Xewn POPS Ue y TIY wo wieny duey ETH HO Jo uoO Wwueny duey E Tp HO JO UCL duey ETH uo wuewy duey ETH a3seyd umop diuey aseyd leuone s aseyd AIGUODEIE aseyd dn duey We Wald UIN LUS UIN uue Wad Xew une Xeln ST seWuUueNWUIN T6TH 0T JeENNHdUIN TST ASVINIWON Jasayr y Jo WON mejag 00T atv 0T JENNEN TZTb CST Jenuuenxey TIT onbuoL Fig 34 41 Main Features Omron SX inverter manual 7 6 Pump sequencer function 7 6 1 Introduction A maximum
245. r protection are disa Off 0 bled PTC 1 Enables the PTC protection of the motor via the insulated option board PT100 2 Enables the PT100 protection for the motor via the insulated option board Enables the PTC protection as well as the PTC PT100 3 PT100 protection for the motor via the insulated option board Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43064 Profibus slot index 168 223 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt NOTE PTC option and PT100 selections can only be selected when the option board is mounted Motor Class 235 Only visible if the PTC PT100 option board is installed Set the class of motor used The trip levels for the PT100 sensor will automatically be set according to the setting in this menu 235 Mot Class St pry F 140 C Default F 140 C A100 C E115 C B 120 C F 140 C F Nema 145 C ul B w N ej O H 165 C Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43065 Profibus slot index 168 224 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt NOTE This menu is only valid for PT100 PT100 Inputs 236 Sets which of PT100 inputs that should be used for thermal protection Deselecting not used PT100 inputs on the PTC PT100 option board in order to ignore those inputs i e extra external wiring is not needed if port is not used
246. re Stp Orpm Default 0 rpm Process Source 321 and Process Unit Dependent on 322 Speed mode 0 max speed 343 Torque mode 0 max torque 351 Min according to menu 324 max accord Other modes ing to menu 325 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 42991 Profibus slot index 168 150 Fieldbus format Long Modbus format Elnt NOTE The actual value in menu 310 is not copied or loaded from the control panel memory when Copy Set 242 Copy to CP 244 or Load from CP 245 is performed NOTE If the MotPot function is used the reference value ramp times are according to the Acc MotPot 333 and Dec MotPot 334 settings Actual speed ramp will be limited according to Acc Time 331 and Dec Time 332 NOTE Write access to this parameter is only allowed when menu Ref Control 214 is set to Keyboard When Reference control is used see section 10 5 Reference signal 11 3 2 Process Settings 320 With these functions the VSD can be set up to fit the application The menus 110 120 310 362 368 and 711 use the process unit selected in 321 and 322 for the application e g rpm bar or m3 h This makes it possible to easily set up the VSD for the required process requirements as well as for copying the range of a feedback sensor to set up the Process Value Minimum and Maximum in order to establish accurate
247. re Fig 44 Menu structure 9 3 1 The main menu This section gives you a short description of the func tions in the Main Menu 100 Preferred View Displayed at power up It displays the actual process value as default Programmable for many other read outs 200 Main Setup Main settings to get the VSD operable The motor data settings are the most important Also option utility and settings 50 Operation via the Control Panel Omron SX inverter manual 300 Process and Application Parameters Settings more relevant to the application such as Ref erence Speed torque limitations PID control settings etc 400 Shaft Power Monitor and Process Protection The monitor function enables the VSD to be used as a load monitor to protect machines and processes against mechanical overload and underload 500 Inputs Outputs and Virtual Connections All settings for inputs and outputs are entered here 600 Logical Functions and Timers All settings for conditional signal are entered here 700 View Operation and Status Viewing all the operational data like frequency load power current etc 800 View Trip Log Viewing the last 10 trips in the trip memory 900 Service Information and VSD Data Electronic type label for viewing the software version and VSD type 9 4 Programming during operation Most of the parameters can be changed during opera tion without stopping the VSD Parameters that can not be changed are
248. regulations and the nominal current of the motor See table 42 page 174 e The litz ground connection see fig 15 is only nec essary if the mounting plate is painted All the varia ble speed drives have an unpainted back side and are therefore suitable for mounting on an unpainted mounting plate Connect the mains cables according to the next fig ures The VSD has as standard a built in RFI mains fil ter that complies with category C3 which suits the Second Environment standard Table 6 Mains and motor connection L1 L2 L3 Mains supply 3 phase PE Safety earth protected earth Motor earth U V W Motor output 3 phase DC DC R Brake resistor DC link connections optional NOTE The Brake and DC link Terminals are only fitted if the Brake Chopper Option is built in WARNING The Brake Resistor must be AN connected between terminals DC and R WARNING In order to work safely the mains AN earth must be connected to PE and the motor earth to _L 3 2 2 Motor cables To comply with the EMC emission standards the varia ble speed drive is provided with a RFI mains filter The motor cables must also be screened and connected on both sides In this way a so called Faraday cage is created around the VSD motor cables and motor The RFI currents are now fed back to their source the IGBTs so the system stays within the emission levels Recommendations for selecting motor
249. rminal isolated Fig 102 Connection of standby supply option Table 32 Al Name Function Specification terminal 1 Ext supply 1 External VSD malh 24 Vpc or 24 power independ Vac 10 ent supply voltage Debie iso 2 Ext supply 2 for control and com lated munication circuits 13 8 Safe Stop option To realize a Safe Stop configuration in accordance with EN954 1 Category 3 the following three parts need to be attended to 1 Inhibit trigger signals with safety relay K1 via Safe Stop option board 2 Enable input and control of VSD via normal I O control signals of VSD 3 Power conductor stage checking status and feed back of driver circuits and IGBT s To enable the VSD to operate and run the motor the following signals should be active e Inhibit input terminals 1 DC and 2 DC on the Safe Stop option board should be made active by NOTE The Safe Stop condition according to EN 954 1 Category 3 can only be realized by de activating both the Inhibit and Enable inputs Omron SX inverter manual Options 165 When the Safe Stop condition is achieved by using these two different methods which are independently controlled this safety circuit ensures that the motor will not start running because e The 24Vp signal is taken away from the Inhibit input terminals 1 and 2 the safety relay K1 is switched off The supply voltage to the driver circui
250. rol Panel This chapter describes how to use the control panel The VSD can be delivered with a control panel or a blank panel 9 1 General The control panel displays the status ofthe VSD and is used to set all the parameters It is also possible to control the motor directly from the control panel The control panel can be built in or located externally via serial communication The VSD can be ordered with out the control panel Instead of the control panel there will be a blank panel NOTE The VSD can run without the control panel being connected However the settings must be such that all control signals are set for external use 9 2 The control panel OMRON SX INVERTER C Display 4 LEDs REV STOP FWD RUN RESET RUN Control Keys q Toggle Key LOC REM ESC Function Keys Fig 35 Control panel 9 2 1 The display The display is back lit and consists of 2 rows each with space for 16 characters The display is divided into six areas The different areas in the display are described below A B C ig Motor Vo StppyMl 400V D E F Fig 36 The display Area A Shows the actual menu number 3 or 4 digits Area B Shows if the menu is in the toggle loop or the VSD is set for Local operation AreaC Shows the heading of the active menu Area D Shows the status of the VSD 3 digits The following status indications are possi ble Acc Acceleration Dec
251. rrent control 0 20MA occoconccccncnnonnninnncnnnonananonncananos 32 D DC link residual voltage cooocioonnnniononiocnnroonncnrernonons 1 Deceleration trar 89 Deceleration time san 89 Ramp type serii nennen 91 Declaration of Conformity ssssssesessseeseresesesesesrseereresesese 9 RT 73 Definitions lien se ee 10 Derains es AE E 172 Digital comparators s c ssccteksssisstetedeneseseaceonazsentesets 136 Digital inputs Board Relais 134 Digln A ea 126 RTE 127 o 127 Dismantling and scrapping coococonnonnncnnnncnnncnnnnnocnnncnonans 10 Display u Gens kage eR Ae 47 Double ended connection sssr 31 Drive mode veian nennen 60 Frequency seta eeh mise 119 Drives on Change neessnenennennnennenenenennnnn 106 107 E E EE 163 Edge control riede 39 63 64 Electrical specification nennenenenenneneneneneennnenenennnnenn 171 EE 17 Current control 0 20MA cseeeseeeeneenneeeneeeneennnennneen 32 Double ended connection 31 RFI mains filter Aasna 17 Single ended connection sses 31 Twisted cables minnanna o 32 Emergency stop aE ien ea ee A 45 ENG60204 EE 9 ENGI 800 Z arrainen r a aja 9 ENG180025 1 a eiiiai 02 tiefe 9 Enable aiii 38 48 126 EXOR Operator sici cecscisiiscscscieticviaseesstesadesesteeraseesieess 140 Expression una 140 Omron SX inverter manual External Control Panel ccccccccccceceeseessecessecsseesseeees 163 F A reran nen eae Erion k EER 73 EE 105 Fieldbus aussi ds 82 164 Fixe
252. rt acceleration time make them longer if necessary Too high motor load Check the motor load Overcunre Excessive load change Check on bad motor cable connections Soft short circuit between phases or phase to earth Poor or loose motor cable connections Too high IxR Compensation level Check on bad earth cable connection Check on water or moisture in the motor housing and cable connections Lower the level of IxR Compensation 352 Over volt D eceleration Over volt G enerator Too high DC Link voltage Too short deceleration time with respect to motor machine inertia Too small brake resistor malfunctioning Brake chopper Check the deceleration time settings and make them longer if necessary Check the dimensions of the brake resistor and the functionality of the Brake chopper if used Over volt Mains O ver volt M ains cut Too high DC Link voltage due to too high mains voltage Motor speed measurement exceeds maxi Check the main supply voltage Try to take away the interference cause or use other main supply lines Check encoder cables wiring and setup Over speed mum level Check motor data setup 22x Perform short ID run Make sure all three phases are properly connected Too low DC Link voltage and that the terminal screws are tightened Too low or no supply voltage Check that the mains supply voltage is within the limits Under voltage M
253. ry 0 Uncontrolled STOP Stopping by switching off the supply voltage A mechanical stop must be activated This STOP may not be implemented with the help of a variable speed drive or its input output signals Category 1 Controlled STOP Stopping until the motor has come to rest after which the mains supply is switched off This STOP may not be implemented with the help of a variable speed drive or its input output signals Category 2 Controlled STOP Stopping while the supply voltage is still present This STOP can be implemented with each of the variable speed drives STOP command WARNING EN 60204 1 specifies that every machine must be provided with a category 0 stop If the application prevents this from being implemented this must be explicitly stated Furthermore every machine must be provided with an Emergency Stop function This emergency stop must ensure that the voltage at the machine contacts which could be dangerous is removed as quickly as possible without resulting in any other danger In such an Emergency Stop situation a category 0 or 1 stop may be used The choice will be decided on the basis of the possible risks to the machine NOTE With option Safe Stop a stop according EN954 1 Category 3 can be achieved See chapter 13 8 page 165 Omron SX inverter manual EMC and Machine Directive 45 46 EMC and Machine Directive Omron SX inverter manual 9 Operation via the Cont
254. s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43082 Profibus slot index 168 241 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 s Modbus format Elnt Pump 25P Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone When the time delay has elapsed the alarm will be reset if the function is active P Pump Stop Off Default Off Off 0 Off 78 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600s Communication information External Motor Trip Type 25S Select the preferred way to react to an alarm trip X Vio Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43095 St PE Tri p Profibus slot index 168 254 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 s ee Trip Modbus format Ent Selection Same as menu 25B Communication information Over Speed 25Q Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43098 When the time delay has elapsed the alarm will be Profibus slot index 168 240 reset if the function is active Fieldbus format Ulnt 0 Over speed Modbus format Ulnt St pry Off Default Off Off 0 Off 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s Liquid cooling low level 25T Delay time starts counting when the fault disappears When the time delay has elapsed the alarm will be reset if the function is active
255. s Max 328 This function is used for scaling if no sensor is used It offers you the possibility of increasing the process accuracy by scaling the process values The process values are scaled by linking them to Known data in the VSD With F Value Proc Max the precise value at which the entered Process Max 525 is valid can be entered NOTE If Speed Torque or Frequency is chosen in menu 321 Proc Source menus 322 328 are hidden Va Pr Max Stp Max Default Max Min 1 Min Max 2 Max 0 000 10000 0 10000 0 000 10000 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43314 86 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual Profibus slot index 169 218 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 rpm Modbus format Elnt Example A conveyor belt is used to transport bottles The required bottle speed needs to be within 10 to 100 bottles s Process characteristics 10 bottles s 150 rom 100 bottles s 1500 rpm The amount of bottles is linearly related to the speed of the conveyor belt Set up Process Min 324 10 Process Max 325 100 Ratio 326 linear F Value ProcMin 327 150 F Value ProcMax 328 1500 With this set up the process data is scaled and linked to known values which results in an accurate control F Value PMax 1500 e en e 328 l l l l l Linear I l F Value
256. s set to STOP mode The output of CA1 is used as a virtual connection source that controls the virtual F 7 In dee s connection destination RUN DC Voltage 8 V Heatsink Tmp 9 ge Menu Function Setting PT100_1 10 C 511 Anin1 Function Process reference PT100_2 11 C 512 Anin1 Set up 4 20 mA threshold is 4 mA PT100_3 12 C 341 Min Speed 0 Energy 13 kWh 343 Max Speed 1500 Run Time 14 fh 611 CAI Value Anin1 Mains Time 15 jh 612 CA1 Level HI 16 3 2mA 20mA x 100 Anin1 16 613 CA1 Level LO 12 2 4mA 20mA x 100 Anin2 17 561 VIO 1 Dest RunR Anin3 18 562 VIO1 Source CA1 Anin4 19 215 Run Stp Ctrl Remote Communication information Reference signal Anin1 Max speed Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 43401 er Profibus slot index 170 50 Fieldbus format Ulnt amp Modbus format Ulnt 4 mA 3 2 mA 2 4 mA CAL Mode I RUN i STOP f CAL Level HI 16 I CA1 Level LO 12 Fig 87 Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 131 Communication information No Description The reference signal passes the Level LO value from 1 below positive edge the comparator CA1 output stays low mode RUN The reference signal passes the Level HI value from 2 below positive edge the comparator CA1 output is set high mode RUN The reference signal passes the thresh
257. s the first operator for the logic Z function St pry Operator amp Default amp Selection Same as menu 622 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43422 Profibus slot index 170 71 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Z Comp 2 633 Selects the second comparator for the logic Z func tion D omp St py IA2 Default 1A2 Selection Same as menu 621 136 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43423 Profibus slot index 170 72 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Z Operator 2 634 Selects the second operator for the logic Z function 632 Oper ator St pry amp Default amp Selection Same as menu 624 Communication information Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 43424 Profibus slot index 170 73 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Z Comp 3 635 Selects the third comparator for the logic Z function 0 omp St pry CDI Default CD1 Selection Same as menu 621 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43425 Profibus slot index 170 74 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt 11 6 4 Timerl 640 The Timer functions can be used as a delay timer or as an interval with separ
258. s the full range for the output signal See Fig 81 2 10V The voltage output has a fixed threshold Live Zero of 2 V and controls the full range for the output signal See Fig 82 User V The scale of the voltage controlled output that controls the full range for the output signal Can be defined by the advanced AnOut Min and AnOut Max menus User Bipol V N Sets the output for a bipolar voltage out put where the scale controls the range for the output signal Scale can be defined in advanced menu AnOut Bipol Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43252 Profibus slot index 169 156 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Ret VSD 1 Ref VSD 2 Master Slave AnOut Fig 85 Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 123 AnOutl Advanced 533 With the functions in the AnOut1 Advanced menu the output can be completely defined according to the application needs The menus will automatically be adapted to mA or V according to the selection in AnOut1 Setup 532 An Ou Adv St pry AnOutl Min 5331 This parameter is automatically displayed if User mA or User V is selected in menu AnOut 1 Setup 532 The menu will automatically adapt to current or volt age setting according to the selected setup Only visi ble if 532 User MAN An Qu Min Stop 4mA Default 4mA Range 0 00
259. saves the last 10 trips in the trip memory The trip memory refreshes on the FIFO principle First In First Out Every trip in the memory is logged on the time of the Run Time 731 counter At every trip the actual values of several parameter are stored and available for troubleshooting 11 8 1 Trip Message log 810 Display the cause of the trip and what time that it occurred When a trip occurs the status menus are copied to the trip message log There are nine trip Trip menu Copied from Description 811 711 Process Value 812 712 Speed 813 712 Torque 814 714 Shaft Power 815 715 Electrical Power 816 716 Current 817 717 Output voltage 818 718 Frequency 819 719 DC Link voltage 81A 71A Heatsink Temperature 81B 71B PT100_1 2 3 81C 721 VSD Status 81D 723 Digital input status 81E 724 Digital output status 81F 725 Analogue input status 1 2 81G 726 Analogue input status 3 4 81H 727 Analogue output status 1 2 146 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual Trip menu Copied from Description 81l 728 I O status option board 1 81 729 I O status option board 2 81K 72A I O status option board 3 81L 731 Run Time 81M 732 Mains Time 81N 733 Energy 810 310 Process reference Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31102 31135 121 246 254 Profibus slot index 122 0 24 Depends on parameter see res
260. set deceleration ramp to avoid water hammer Also see section 12 2 page 158 Autoreset example In an application it is known that the main supply volt age sometimes disappears for a very short time a so called dip That will cause the VSD to trip an Under voltage alarm Using the Autoreset function this trip will be acknowledged automatically e Enable the Autoreset function by making the reset input continuously high e Activate the Autoreset function in the menu 251 Number of trips e Select in menus 252 to 25N the Trip condition that are allowed to be automatically reset by the Autoreset function after the set delay time has expired Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 73 Number of Trips 251 Any number set above O activates the Autoreset This means that after a trip the VSD will restart automati cally according to the number of attempts selected No restart attempts will take place unless all condi tions are normal If the Autoreset counter not visible contains more trips than the selected number of attempts the Autoreset cycle will be interrupted No Autoreset will then take place If there are no trios for more than 10 minutes the Autoreset counter decreases by one If the maximum number of trips has been reached the trip message hour counter is marked with an A If the Autoreset is full then the VSD must be reset by a normal Reset Example
261. slot index 169 229 Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 43324 Fieldbus format Ulnt Profibus slot index 169 228 Modbus format Ulnt Fieldbus format Long 1 1 s Modbus format Elnt Load Type 415 In this menu you select monitor type according to the load characteristic of your application By selecting the required monitor type the overload and underload alarm function can be optimized according to the load characteristic Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 109 Max Alarm 416 Max Alarm Margin 4161 With load type Basic 415 used the Max Alarm Mar gin sets the band above the Normal Load 41B menu that does not generate an alarm With load type Load Curve 415 used the Max Alarm Margin sets the band above the Load Curve 41C that does not generate an alarm The Max Alarm Margin is a per centage of nominal motor torque A Max Pr eAl Mar St pry 10 Default 10 Range 0 400 Communication information Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 43327 Profibus slot index 169 231 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 1 Modbus format Elnt 4 LO Max Al ar mMar Stpry 15 Default 15 Range 0 400 Communication information Max Pre Alarm delay 4172 Sets the delay time between the first occurrence of max pre alarm condition and after when the alarm is Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 43326 Profibus slot index 169
262. stance number Slot Index M2 44041 44048 172 180 to 174 187 M3 45041 45048 176 160 to 176 167 M4 46041 46048 180 140 to 180 147 M1 contains parameters 43041 to 43048 The M2 M3 and M4 contains the same type of information For example parameter 43043 in motor M1 contain the same type of information as 44043 in M2 A DeviceNet instance number can easily be converted into a Profibus slot index number according to description in section section 11 8 2 page 153 10 4 Start and stop commands Set start and stop commands via serial communica tion Modbus DeviceNet Integer Function Instance number value 42901 0 Reset Run active together with 42902 1 either RunR or RunL to perform start 42903 2 RunR 42904 3 RunL Note Bipolar mode is activated if both RunR and RunL is active 10 5 Reference signal When menu Reference Control 214 is set to Com the following parameter data should be used Default 0 Range 32768 to 32767 Corresponding to 100 to 100 ref Communication information Modbus DeviceNet Instance number roe Profibus slot Index 168 64 Fieldbus format Int Modbus format Int 10 5 1 Process value It is also possible to send the Process value over a bus e g from a processor or temperature sensor Set menu Process Source 321 to F Bus Use follow ing parameter data for the process valu
263. t Ulnt Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 129 Virtual Connection 1 Source 562 With this function the source of the virtual connection is defined See DigOut 1 for description of the different selections 0 VIC ource St pry off Default Off Selection Same as for menu 541 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43282 Profibus slot index 169 186 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Virtual Connections 2 8 563 to 56G Same function as virtual connection 1 561 and 562 Communication information for virtual connections 2 8 Destination 43283 43285 43287 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43289 43291 43293 43295 169 187 189 191 Profibus slot index 193 195 197 199 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Communication information for virtual connections 2 8 Source 43284 43286 43288 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43290 43292 43294 43296 169 188 190 192 Profibus slot index 194 196 198 200 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt 11 6 Logical Functions and Timers 600 With the Comparators Logic Functions and Timers conditional signals can be programmed for control or signalling features This gives you the ability to com pare different signals and values in order to generate monitoring controlling features 11 6 1 Comparat
264. t doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Do not dismantle repair or modify this product if you re not authorised and qualified for it Doing so may result in an injury DC link residual voltage After switching off the mains supply dangerous voltage can still be present in the VSD When opening the VSD for installing and or commissioning activities wait at least 10 min utes In case of malfunction a qualified technician should check the DC link or wait for one hour before dismantling the VSD for repair Opening the variable speed drive cover Only qualified technician can open the inverter Always take adequate precautions before opening the inverter Although the connections for the control signals and the switches are isolated from the main voltage do not touch the control board when the variable speed drive is switched on gt P PPP PPP Do not manipulate inverter under power Do not change wiring put on or take off optional devices or replace cooling fans while the input power is being supplied Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock Inspection of the Inverter must be conducted after the power supply has been turned off Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock The main power supply is not necessarily shut off even if the emergency shutoff function is activated Omron SX inverter manual Precautions to be taken with
265. t to Preset Ctrl1 Preset Ctrl2 or Preset Ctrl3 The amount digital inputs used that are set to Preset Ctrl determines the number of Preset References available using 1 input gives 2 speeds using 2 inputs gives 4 speeds and using 3 inputs gives 8 speeds Example The use of four fixed speeds at 50 100 300 800 rom requires the following settings e Set Digln 5 as first selection input set 525 to Pre set Ctrl1 e Set Digln 6 as second selection input set 526 to Preset Ctrl2 e Set menu 341 Min Speed to 50 rpm e Set menu 362 Preset Ref 1 to 100 rpm e Set menu 363 Preset Ref 2 to 300 rpm e Set menu 364 Preset Ref 3 to 800 rpm With these settings the VSD switched on and a RUN command given the speed will be e 50 rpm when both Digln 5 and Digln 6 are low e 100 rom when Digln 5 is high and Digln 6 is low e 300 rpm when Digln 5 is low and Digln 6 is high e 800 rpm when both Digln 5 and DigIn 6 are high 7 2 Remote control functions Operation of the Run Stop Enable Reset functions As default all the run stop reset related commands are programmed for remote operation via the inputs on the terminal strip terminals 1 22 on the control board With the function Run Stp Ctrl 215 and Reset Control 216 this can be selected for keyboard or serial communication control NOTE The examples in this paragraph do not cover all possibilities Only the most relevant combinations are
266. tage 652 Timer2 Mode Off 81A Heatsink Tmp 653 Timer2 Delay 10 00 00 81B PT100_1 2 3 654 Timer 2 T1 0 00 00 s c Fl Status 655 Timer2 T2 0 00 00 81D Digin status es9 Itmer2 Value 0000 81E DigOut status 700 Oper Status 81F Anln status 1 2 81G Anln status 3 4 81H AnOut status 1 2 710 Operation 711 Process Val Omron SX inverter manual Menu List 185 DEFAULT CUSTOM 811 IO Status Bl 81 IO Status B2 81K IO Status B3 81L Run Time s m Mains Time 81N Energy 820 Trip Message 821 Process Value 822 Speed 823 Torque 824 Shaft Power 825 Electrical Power 826 Current 827 Output voltage 828 Frequency 829 DCLink voltage 82A Heatsink Tmp 828 PT100_1 2 3 s2c Fl Status 82D Digln status 82E DigOut status 82F Anin status 1 2 82G Anin status 3 4 82H AnOut status 1 2 821 10 Status Bl 82 IO Status B2 82K IO Status B3 82L Run Time 82M Mains Time 82N Energy 830 831 Process Value 832 Speed 833 Torque 834 Shaft Power 835 Electrical Power 836 Current 837 Output voltage 838 Frequency 839 DC Link voltage Heatsink Temperature 83B PT100_1 2 3 FI Status Digln status 83E DigOut status 83F Anin status 1 2 Aln status 3 4 DEFAULT C
267. ted Cesky 8 Czech selected Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43011 Profibus slot index 168 170 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Select Motor 212 This menu is used if you have more than one motor in your application Select the motor to define It is possi ble to define up to four different motors M1 to M4 in the VSD elect Motor Stpry M1 Default M1 M1 0 M2 1 Motor Data is connected to selected M3 gt motor M4 3 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43012 Profibus slot index 168 171 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Drive Mode 213 This menu is used to set the control mode for the motor Settings for the reference signals and read outs is made in menu Process source 321 e V Hz Mode output speed 721 in rpm is used when several motors in parallel of different type or size are connected or if parallel motors are not mechanically connected to the load Drive Mode St ply V Hz Default V Hz All control loops are related to frequency control NOTE All the functions and menu read outs with regard to speed and rpm e g Max Speed 1500 rpm Min Speed 0 rpm etc remain speed and rpm although they represent the output frequency V Hz 2 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 4
268. tems are selectable With the switch in current mode only the current menu items are selectable Aninl Setup St pry 4 20mA Default 4 20 mA Dependent on Setting of switch S1 The current input has a fixed threshold Live Zero of 4 mA and controls the full range for the input signal See Fig 82 4 20mA 0 Normal full current scale configuration of the input that controls the full range for the input signal See Fig 81 0 20mA 1 The scale of the current controlled input that controls the full range for the input sig nal Can be defined by the advanced Anin Min and AnIn Max menus UsermA 2 Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 115 Sets the input for a bipolar current input User Bipol where the scale controls the range for the mA input signal Scale can be defined in advanced menu Anln Bipol LA Normal full voltage scale configuration of the input that controls the full range for the input signal See Fig 81 0 10V 4 The voltage input has a fixed threshold Live Zero of2 Vand controls the full range for the input signal See Fig 82 2 10V 5 The scale of the voltage controlled input that controls the full range for the input sig nal Can be defined by the advanced Anin Min and Anin Max menus User V 6 Sets the input for a bipolar voltage input User Bipol where the scale controls the range for the V input signal Scale can
269. th B and give start command fi The VSD will now measure some motor parameters The motor makes some beeping sounds but the shaft does not rotate When the ID run is finished after about one minute Test Run OK is displayed press EZ to continue 12 Use Anin1 as input for the reference value The default range is 4 20 mA If you need a 0 10 V ref erence value change switch S1 on control board and set 512 Anin 1 Set up to 0 10V 13 Switch off power supply 14 Connect digital and analogue inputs outputs as in Fig 22 15 Ready 16 Switch on power supply 4 3 4 Run the VSD Now the installation is finished and you can press the external start button to start the motor When the motor is running the main connections are OK 4 4 Local control Manual control via the control panel can be used to carry out a test run Use a 400 V motor and the control panel 4 4 1 Switch on the mains Close the door to the VSD Once the mains is switched on the VSD is started and the internal fan will run for 5 seconds 4 4 2 Select manual control Menu 100 Preferred View is displayed when started 1 Press to display menu 200 Main Setup Press B to display menu 210 Operation Press a to display menu 211 Language BP WO MN Press to display menu 214 Reference Con trol 5 Select Keyboard using the key A and press a to confirm 6 Press to get to menu 215 Run Stop Control 7 S
270. the load of the motor at the time the dip occurs see Fig 79 Rotor locked 422 With the rotor locked function enabled the VSD will protect the motor and application when this is stalled whilst increasing the motor speed from standstill This protection will coast the motor to stop and indicate a fault when the Torque Limit has been active at very low speed for more than 5 seconds f notor locked St pry off Default Off Off 0 No detection On 1 VSD will trip when locked rotor is detected Trip message Locked Rotor Communication information Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 43362 Profibus dot index 170 11 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt d ow Vo OR St pry On Default On Off 0 At a voltage dip the low voltage trip will protect On 1 At mains dip VSD ramps down until voltage rises Communication information Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 43361 Profibus slot index 170 10 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Motor lost 423 With the motor lost function enabled the VSD is able to detect a fault in the motor circuit motor motor cable thermal relay or output filter Motor lost will cause a trip and the motor will coast to standstill when a missing motor phase is detected during a period of 5 s DC link voltage 4 Motor los St ppy Off Default Off Function switched off
271. the speed with separate up and down commands over remote signals The MotPot function has sepa rate ramps settings which can be set in Acc MotPot 333 and Dec MotPot 334 If the MotPot function is selected this is the accelera tion time for the MotPot up command The accelera tion time is defined as the time it takes for the motor potentiometer value to increase from O rpm to nominal speed Acceleration Time to Minimum Speed 335 If minimum speed 341 gt 0 rpm is used in an applica tion the VSD uses separate ramp times below this level With Acc gt MinSpeed 335 and Dec lt MinSpeed 336 you can set the required ramp times Short times can be used to prevent damage and excessive pump wear due too little lubrication at lower speeds Longer times can be used to fill up a system smoothly and prevent water hammer due to rapidly exhausting air from the pipe system If a Minimum speed is programmed this parameter will be used to set the acceleration time to the mini mum speed at a run command The ramp time is defined as the time it takes for the motor to accelerate from O rpm to nominal motor speed 88 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual Kec gt Min Spe Acceleration Ramp Type 337 St PE 10 05 Sets the type of all the acceleration ramps in a param eter set See Fig 56 Depending on the acceleration Default 10 05 and deceleration requ
272. to U U V V and W W NOTE The terminals DC DC and R are options Switches between the motor and the VSD If the motor cables are to be interrupted by mainte nance switches output coils etc it is necessary that the screening is continued by using metal housing metal mounting plates etc as shown in the Fig 15 Fig 16 shows an example when there is no metal mounting plate used e g if IP54 variable speed drives are used It is important to keep the circuit closed by using metal housing and cable glands Screen connection of signal cables ER Motor cable DET af shield connection Fig 14 Screen connection of cables Pay special attention to the following points e f paint must be removed steps must be taken to prevent subsequent corrosion Repaint after mak ing connections e The fastening of the whole variable speed drive housing must be electrically connected with the mounting plate over an area which is as large as possible For this purpose the removal of paint is necessary An alternative method is to connect the variable speed drive housing to the mounting plate with as short a length of litz wire as possible e Try to avoid interruptions in the screening wherever possible e Ifthe variable speed drive is mounted in a standard
273. to be used if no Override level 4 Low Volt a level e Kee Speed gt 4 4 06 F60new Fig 79 Low voltage override Off 0 motor or very small motor connected NOTE During the low voltage override the LED trip limit blinks Trip 1 VSD will trip when the motor is discon nected Trip message Motor Lost Communication information Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 43363 Profibus slot index 170 12 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 113 Overvolt control 424 Used to switch off the overvoltage control function when only braking by brake chopper and resistor is required The overvoltage control function limits the braking torque so that the DC link voltage level is con trolled at a high but safe level This is achieved by limiting the actual deceleration rate during stopping In case of a defect at the brake chopper or the brake resistor the VSD will trip for Overvoltage to avoid a fall of the load e g in crane applications The input value equals the actual process value feedback and is compared to the reference signal set point by the PID con troller or can be used to display and view the actual process value LA Process Val Reference value is set for control in proc ess units see Process Source 321 and Process Unit 322 Process
274. tor speed so that it has an accurate process value when no feedback signal is used See Fig 51 O Ratio St pry Linear Default Linear Linear 0 Process is linear related to speed torque Quadratic 1 Process is quadratic related to speed torque Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43312 Profibus slot index 169 216 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Process unit Process Max 325 Ratio Linear Ratio Quadratic Process Min 324 Min Max Speed Speed 341 343 Fig 51 Ratio F Value Process Min 327 This function is used for scaling if no sensor is used It offers you the possibility of increasing the process accuracy by scaling the process values The process values are scaled by linking them to known data in the VSD With F Value Proc Min 327 the precise value at which the entered Process Min 324 is valid can be entered NOTE If Speed Torque or Frequency is chosen in menu 321 Proc Source menus 322 328 are hidden Va PrMin St pry Min Default Min According to Min Speed setting in Min 1 341 E According to Max Speed setting in Max 2 343 0 000 10000 0 10000 0 000 10000 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43313 Profibus slot index 169 217 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 rpm Modbus format Elnt F Value Proces
275. torque will result in 1600 power loss which will increase the motor temperature very quickly IxR Compensation 352 This function compensates for the drop in voltage over different resistances such as very long motor cables chokes and motor stator by increasing the output volt age at a constant frequency IxR Compensation is most important at low frequencies and is used to obtain a higher starting torque The maximum voltage increase is 25 of the nominal output voltage See Fig 63 Selecting Automatic will use the optimal value according to the internal model of motor User Defined can be selected when the start conditions of the application do not change and a high starting torque is always required A fixed IxR Compensation value can be set in the menu 353 XR Comp St pry Of f Default Off Off 0 Function disabled Automatic 1 Automatic compensation User Defined 2 User defined value in percent Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43142 Profibus slot index 169 46 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt U 100 IxR Comp 25 25 Fig 63 IxR Comp at Linear V Hz curve 96 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual IxR Comp user 353 Only visible if User Defined is selected in previous menu xR CompUsr St pry 0 0 Default 0 0 Range 0 25 x Unom 0 1 of resolution
276. ts of the power con ductors is switched off This will inhibit the trigger pulses to the power conductors e The trigger pulses from the control board are shut down The Enable signal is monitored by the controller circuit which will forward the information to the PWM part on the Control board To make sure that the safety relay K1 has been switched off this should be guarded externally to ensure that this relay did not refuse to act The Safe Stop option board offers a feedback signal for this via a second forced switched safety relay K2 which is switched on when a detection circuit has confirmed that the supply voltage to the driver circuits is shut down See Table 33 for the contacts connections To monitor the Enable function the selection RUN on a digital output can be used For setting a digital output e g terminal 20 in the example Fig 105 please refer to section 11 5 4 page 132 540 When the Inhibit input is de activated the VSD dis play will show a blinking SST indication in section D bottom left corner and the red Trip LED on the Con trol panel will blink To resume normal operation the following steps have to be taken e Release Inhibit input 24Vpg High to terminal 1 and 2 e Give a STOP signal to the VSD according to the set Run Stop Control in menu 215 e Give anew Run command according to the set Run Stop Control in menu 215 NOTE The method of generating a STOP comm
277. u 25B Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43079 Profibus slot index 168 238 Fieldbus format Vint Modbus format Ulnt PTC 25E Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone When the time delay has elapsed the alarm will be reset if the function is active St pry Of f Default Off Off 0 Off 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s 76 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43084 Profibus slot index 168 243 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 s Modbus format Elnt PTC Trip Type 25F Select the preferred way to react to a PTC trip St pry Trip Default Trip Selection Same as menu 25B Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43085 Profibus slot index 168 244 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt External Trip 25G Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone When the time delay has elapsed the alarm will be reset if the function is active Selection Same as menu 25B Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43081 Profibus dot index 168 240 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Communication Error 251 Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone When the time delay has elapsed the alarm will be reset if th
278. ual NOTE At switching frequencies gt 3 kHz derating may become necessary If the heat sink temperature gets too high the switching frequency is decreased to avoid tripping This is done automatically in the VSD The default switching frequency is 3 kHz Encoder Feedback 22B Only visible if the Encoder option board is installed This parameter enables or disables the encoder feed back from the motor to the VSD speed 712 If you get the wrong sign for the value swap encoder input A and B D Enc Speed amp StppyMl XXrpm Unit rpm Resolution speed measured via the encoder Communication information p ncoder Stppymi off Default Off On 0 Encoder feedback enabled Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 42911 Profibus slot index 168 70 Fieldbus format Int Modbus format Int Off 1 Encoder feedback disabled Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43051 Profibus slot index 168 210 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Encoder Pulses 22C Motor PWM 22E Menus for advanced setup of motor modulation properties PWM Pulse Width Modulation PWM Fswitch 22E1 Set the PWM switching frequency of the VSD BTV Only visible if the Encoder option board is installed c This parameter describes the number of
279. ue signals can be achieved by combining a few functions This is described in the Chapter 7 page 35 AUN p r St pry Remote Default Remote The start stop signal comes from the digital Eon 0 inputs of the terminal strip terminals 1 22 Keyboard 1 Start and stop is set on the Control Panel The start stop is set via the serial communi Com 2 cation RS 485 Fieldbus See Fieldbus or RS232 485 option manual for details Option 3 The start stop is set via an option Communication information Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 43015 Profibus dot index 168 174 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Reset Contmrol 216 When the VSD is stopped due to a failure a reset command is required to make it possible to restart the VSD Use this function to select the source of the reset signal 0 kese r Stpry Remote Default Remote Reniote 0 The command comes from the inputs of the terminal strip terminals 1 22 Keyboard 1 The command comes from the command y keys of the Control Panel Com 2 The command comes from the serial communication RS 485 Fieldbus The command comes from the inputs of Remote 3 the terminal strip terminals 1 22 or the Keyb keyboard Com The command comes from the serial 4 communication RS485 Fieldbus or the Keyb keyboard The command comes from the inputs of Rem Keyb 5 the terminal strip terminals 1 22
280. ues in a MENU sssrini 51 Copy current parameter to all sets 51 Programming example 51 Omron SX inverter manual 10 Serial communication 53 10 1 Mod bus AU E 53 10 2 Parameter Sets uensnsnsennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennenennennennannen 53 10 3 Motor data an ae 53 10 4 Start and stop Commande eect tenet 54 10 5 Reference sonal 54 10 5 1 Process value cococcccociccononincnnononcnnonononononcrnncnnininos 54 10 6 Description of the Elnt formats s es 54 11 Functional Description 59 11 1 Preferred View 100 ee 59 11 1 1 TstLine IT Olivia RR 59 11 1 2 2nd Eine 11201 As aaa 60 11 2 Main Setup DO0l e 60 11 2 1 Operation 210 EE 60 11 2 2 Remote Signal Level Edge DIAL 63 11 2 3 Mains supply voltage DI8l eee eee 64 11 2 4 Motor Data D20l e 64 11 2 5 Motor Protection 230 69 11 2 6 Parameter Set Handling 240 72 11 2 7 Trip Autoreset Trip Conditions 250 74 11 2 8 Serial Communication 260 81 11 3 Process and Application Parameters 300 83 11 3 1 Set View Reference Value 310 11 3 2 Process Settings 320 11 3 3 Start Stop settings 330 11 3 4 Mechanical brake control 11 3 5 Speed 340 11 36 Torques 35 0 lindaa 11 3 7 Preset References 9601 11 3 8 PI Speed Control 370 nennen 11 3 9 PID Process Control D80l 1 11 3 10 Pump Fan Control 390 cesses 11 3 11 Crane Option 3A0 e 11 4 Load
281. uire larger fuses and cables Torque control reduces start current Same fuses 331 336 351 Cause stress on equipment and higher energy cost can be used as those required for the motor Difficult to compensate for pressure fluctuations Wasted energy and risk of production stop PID function continuously adapts pressure to the level required 320 380 Motor runs at same speed despite varying demande Energy is lost and equipment stressed PID continuously adapts air flow to level required Sleep function activated when none is needed 320 380 342 354 Process inefficiency due to e g a broken damper a valve not fully opened or a worn belt Load Curve Protection quickly detects deviation Warning is sent or safety stop activated 411 419 41C1 41C9 34 Applications Omron SX inverter manual 7 Main Features This chapter contains descriptions of the main fea tures of the VSD 7 1 Parameter sets Parameter sets are used if an application requires dif ferent settings for different modes For example a machine can be used for producing different products and thus requires two or more maximum speeds and acceleration deceleration times With the four parame ter sets different control options can be configured with respect to quickly changing the behaviour of the VSD It is possible to adapt the VSD online to altered machine behaviour This is based on the fact that at any desired
282. un Times 1 6 39H to 39M 9 ime St oU h mm Unit h m hours minutes Range 0h 0m 65535h 59m Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31051 hours 31052 minutes 31054 hours 31055 minutes 31057 hours 31058 minutes 31060 hours 31061 minutes 31063 hours 31064 minutes 31066 hours 31067 minutes 11 4 Load Monitor and Process Protection 400 11 4 1 Load Monitor 410 The monitor functions enable the VSD to be used as a load monitor Load monitors are used to protect machines and processes against mechanical overload and underload e g a conveyer belt or screw conveyer jamming belt failure on a fan and a pump dry running See explanation in section 7 5 page 40 Alarm Select 411 Selects the types of alarms that are active 121 195 121 198 121 201 a EE Profibus slot index 121 204 121 207 121 210 St pry Of f Fieldbus format Ulnt Default Off Modbus format Ulnt Off 0 No alarm functions active Min 1 Min Alarm active The alarm output func Reset Run Times 1 6 39H1 to 39M1 tions as an underload alarm AAA Max 2 Max Alarm active The alarm output func J RS Run m tions as an overload alarm Odd A No Both Max and Min alarm are active The Max Min 3 alarm outputs function as overload and Default No underload alarms des 2 Communication information Yes 1
283. urce Off 715 Electrical Power 56D VIO7 Dest Off 716 Current 56E VIO 7 Source Off 717 Output volt 56F VIO8 Dest Off 718 Frequency 56G VIO 8 Source Off 719 DC Voltage 600 Logical amp Timers 71A Heatsink Tmp 610 Comparators 718 PT100_1 2 3 fen CAlValue Speed 720 Status 612 CA1 Level HI 300rpm 721 VSD Status 613 ICAL Level LOD 200rpm 722 Warning 614 CA2 Value Torque 723 DigIn Status 615 CA2 Level HI 20 724 DigOut Status 616 CA2 Level LO 10 725 Anin Status 1 2 ez CDI fun TI 726 Anin Status 3 4 618 CD2 Digln 1 437 AnOut Status 1 620 Logic Output Y 2 621 Y Comp 1 CAL 728 lO Status Bl 622 Y Operator 1 amp 729 lO Status B2 623 Y Comp 2 1A2 72A lO Status B3 624 Y Operator 2 amp 730 Stored Val 625 Y Comp 3 CD1 731 Run Time 00 00 00 630 Logic Z 7311 Reset RunTm No 631 ZComp 1 CAL 732 Mains Time 00 00 00 632 Z Operator 1 amp 733 Energy kWh 633 Z Comp2 1A2 7331 Rst Energy No 634 Z Operator 2 amp 800 View TripLog 635 Z Comp 3 CD1 810 Trip Message 811 Process Value 640 Timerl 641 Timerl Trig Off 812 Speed 642 Timerl Mode Off 813 Torque 643 Timerl Delay 0 00 00 814 Shaft Power 644 Timer 1 T1 0 00 00 815 Electrical Power 645 Timerl T2 0 00 00 816 Current 649 Timerl Value 0 00 00 817 Output voltage 650 Timer2 818 Frequency 651 Timer2 Trig Off 819 DC Link vol
284. urrents 4 Motor Curr 8 StppyMi InomA Default Inom see note section 11 2 4 page 64 64 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual Range 25 150 X Inom Communication information Range 2 144 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43044 Profibus slot index 168 203 j Long Fieldbus format 1 01A Modbus format Elnt Inom is the nominal VSD current Motor Speed 225 Set the nominal asynchronous motor speed Motor Speed 8 StppyM1 nyor rpm Default npor see note section 11 2 4 page 64 Range 50 18000 rpm Resolution 1 rpm 4 sign digits WARNING Do NOT enter a synchronous no J load motor speed NOTE Maximum speed 343 is not automatically changed when the motor speed is changed NOTE Entering a wrong too low value can cause a dangerous situation for the driven application due to high speeds Communication information Modbus Instance nol DeviceNet no 43046 Profibus slot index 168 205 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 pole Modbus format Elnt Motor Cos o 227 Set the nominal Motor cosphi power factor Motor Coso 8 StppyMi Default COS nom see note section 11 2 4 page 64 Range 0 50 1 00 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43047 Profibus slot index 168 206 F
285. ven Fast 0 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43109 Profibus slot index 169 13 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Spinstart 33 A The spinstart will smoothly start amotor which is already rotating by catching the motor at the actual speed and control it to the desired speed If in an application such as an exhausting fan the motor shaft is already rotating due to external conditions a smooth start of the application is required to prevent excessive wear With the spinstart on the actual con trol of the motor is delayed due to detecting the actual speed and rotation direction which depend on motor size running conditions of the motor before the Spin start inertia of the application etc Depending on the motor electrical time constant and the size of the motor it can take maximum a couple of minutes before the motor is caught A gt pinstar St pry Off Default Off Off 0 No spinstart If the motor is already running the VSD can trip or will start with high current Spinstart will allow the start of a running On motor without tripping or high inrush currents Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43110 Profibus slot index 169 14 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Stop Mode 33B When the VSD is stopped different methods to come to a standstill can be selected in ord
286. y Off 0 Output is not active and constantly low Output is made constantly high i e On 1 for checking circuits and trouble shooting Running The VSD output is active Run 2 produces current for the motor Stop 3 The VSD output is not active The output frequency 0 0 1Hz when 0Hz 4 er in Run condition Acc Dec 5 The speed is increasing or decreasing along the acc ramp dec ramp At Process 6 The output Reference At Maxspd 7 The frequency is limited by the Maxi Advanced 533 del No Trip 8 No Trip condition active 5 AnOu Advan Trip 9 ATrip condition is active St PLY AutoRst Trip 10 Autoreset trip condition active Limit 11 ALimit condition is active Communication information Warning 12 A Warning condition is active 43263 43267 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43546 43556 169 167 169 171 Profibus slot index 170 195 170 205 The VSD is ready for operation and to accept a start command This means that the VSD is powered up and healthy Ready 13 The torque is limited by the torque T Tim 14 limit function The output current is higher than the motor nominal current 224 reduced according to Motor ventilation 228 see Fig 49 I gt Inom 15 The output is used to control a Brake 16 mechanical brake One of the Anln input signals is lower Sgni lt Offset 17 than 75 of the threshold level The max or min alarm lev
287. y Orpm 100 Default 100 Range 0 400 of max torque Communication information 43336 43337 rpm 43338 43339 rpm 43340 43341 rpm 43342 43343 rpm Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43344 43345 rpm 43346 43347 rpm 43348 43349 rpm 43350 43351 rpm 43352 43353 rpm 169 240 169 242 169 244 169 246 169 248 169 250 169 252 169 254 Profibus slot index 170 1 Fieldbus format Long Modbus format Elnt NOTE The speed values depend on the Min and Max Speed values they are read only and cannot be changed Min Max alarm tolerance band graph 000 Measured load samples I Min max tolerance band Maxalarm limit Minalarm limit 112 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual 11 4 2 Process Protection 420 Submenu with settings regarding protection functions for the VSD and the motor Low Voltage Override 421 If a dip in the mains supply occurs and the low voltage override function is enabled the VSD will automatically decrease the motor speed to keep control of the application and prevent an under voltage trip until the input voltage rises again Therefore the rotating energy in the motor load is used to keep the DC link voltage level at the override level for as long as possible or until the motor comes to a standstill This is depend ent on the inertia of the motor load combination and

Omron SX inverter manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents